WO2023142731A1 - Method for sharing multimedia file, sending end device, and receiving end device - Google Patents
Method for sharing multimedia file, sending end device, and receiving end device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023142731A1 WO2023142731A1 PCT/CN2022/138535 CN2022138535W WO2023142731A1 WO 2023142731 A1 WO2023142731 A1 WO 2023142731A1 CN 2022138535 W CN2022138535 W CN 2022138535W WO 2023142731 A1 WO2023142731 A1 WO 2023142731A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- shooting
- editing
- file
- multimedia file
- interface
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F16/00—Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
- G06F16/10—File systems; File servers
- G06F16/17—Details of further file system functions
- G06F16/176—Support for shared access to files; File sharing support
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/62—Control of parameters via user interfaces
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/63—Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/68—Control of cameras or camera modules for stable pick-up of the scene, e.g. compensating for camera body vibrations
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to a method for sharing multimedia files, a sending end device and a receiving end device.
- the user can use electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets to take pictures of things he likes, or to record interesting things in daily life.
- electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets to take pictures of things he likes, or to record interesting things in daily life.
- a user can take multimedia files such as interesting photos, videos, dynamic pictures in graphics interchange format (gif), and share the photos, videos and other multimedia files with other users.
- multimedia files such as interesting photos, videos, dynamic pictures in graphics interchange format (gif), and share the photos, videos and other multimedia files with other users.
- the user may modify or reset one or more shooting parameters such as focal length, resolution, and color indicators; or, after the shooting is completed, the user may modify multimedia files such as photos and videos
- a series of editing processes such as adjusting one or more parameters such as beautification level, brightness, filter, etc., can obtain user-satisfied and interesting multimedia files.
- a user shares photos, videos and other multimedia files with other electronic devices, what is finally shared is the result of the multimedia files.
- the photos, videos and other multimedia files can be used as independent
- the file is saved locally, and it is only presented on the receiving end device as a result file.
- the receiving user When the receiving user also expects to take photos and videos that are similar to the received multimedia files, they may not be able to take the same interesting photos and videos due to lack of relevant shooting experience; or, the receiving user may spend a lot of time To adjust the shooting parameters, it is not necessarily possible to obtain the desired display effect.
- the present application provides a method and electronic device for sharing multimedia files, which can share the shooting process and editing experience of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can guide the shooting process according to the shooting guidance file, and/or , make interesting multimedia files according to the editing guide file, which improves the user experience.
- the first aspect provides a method for sharing multimedia files, which is applied to electronic devices.
- the method includes: a method for sharing multimedia files, which is characterized in that it is applied to a sending end device including a display screen.
- the method includes: detecting To the first operation for sharing a multimedia file, the multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips; in response to the first operation, determine n templates associated with the multimedia file, and display
- the first sharing interface of the multimedia file includes the multimedia file, the n templates, and one or more sharing methods, each of the n templates includes
- the multimedia file has one or more parameters with different display effects, n is an integer greater than or equal to 1; on the first sharing interface, a second operation for selecting a template to be shared is detected, and in response to the The second operation is to determine the template to be shared, and the template to be shared is one or more of the n templates; the third operation for selecting a sharing method is detected, and in response to the third operation, From the one or more sharing methods, determine the selected sharing
- the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can display the original file and intermediate file associated with the multimedia file for the user during the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device by the sending device , final file, shooting guide file and editing guide file, and support the user to manually select one or more files to be shared.
- users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
- This method realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process while sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can
- the shooting process is guided according to the shooting parameters included in the shooting instruction file, and/or interesting multimedia files are produced according to the editing parameters included in the editing instruction file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the "multimedia file" in the embodiment of the present application may be photos, animations or video clips taken by the user through the camera application of the electronic device, etc., or it may be a photo downloaded by the user from the network, server, social platform, etc. , moving pictures or video clips, etc., or received photos, moving pictures or video clips sent by other devices and stored locally on the electronic device, this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
- the electronic device can detect the photo and obtain shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, such as the brightness level of the photo , filter color and other shooting parameters, or obtain the editing parameters of the photo being edited and processed, which will not be repeated here.
- any multimedia file such as a photo, a moving picture, or a video clip may present different display effects when corresponding to different shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
- the sending end device stores multiple multimedia files and one or more templates associated with each multimedia file.
- a certain multimedia file is associated with n templates, and the n templates may include shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files associated with the multimedia file.
- the multimedia file may be a photo
- one or more templates associated with the photo may include: a shooting guide file, one or more editing guide files, and the like.
- the multimedia file may be a video segment, and one or more templates associated with the video segment may include: one or more shooting guidance files, one or more editing guidance files, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application .
- each multimedia file may be associated or bound with one or more templates in different ways.
- each multimedia file can be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” of the multimedia file through the file name.
- a unique hash value may be generated for each multimedia file to be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” of the multimedia file.
- the key value preset for each multimedia file is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or “editing guidance file” of the multimedia file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the "first operation” may be an operation in which the user clicks the option or control of "Share” on the details interface of the multimedia file.
- the "second operation" here may include an operation in which the user clicks or selects one or more files.
- the second operation may include four click operations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the "third operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks on the option or control where the sharing method is selected.
- the "fourth operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks to select the display area where the name or icon of the target electronic device is located.
- the target sharing method includes Huawei sharing method, WLAN direct channel sharing method, Bluetooth sharing method, mobile data sharing method or any one of multiple social software sharing methods.
- the n templates include a preset template; and/or, the n templates include the multimedia file associated with the sending device according to A shooting template generated by one or more shooting parameters, the shooting parameters include focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure, sensitivity one or more of the degrees.
- the n templates include editing templates generated by the sending end device according to one or more editing parameters associated with the multimedia file, where the editing parameters include editing processing performed by the user on the multimedia file
- the editing process includes one or more of cropping, adjusting filter color, adjusting beautification parameters, adjusting brightness level, marking processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing, and watermark processing.
- the sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method in response to the fourth operation includes: responding to the fourth operation, through the sharing method, Sending the template to be shared and the multimedia file to the receiving device.
- the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo can be selected by default, and the file corresponding to the photo
- the "original file" in the list is also selected by default, which can simplify the user's operation, and the user can also check the display effect of the photo on the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
- the n templates include an editing template associated with the multimedia file
- the first sharing interface and/or the The second sharing interface further includes the multimedia file with a first display effect, and the first display effect corresponds to the editing template.
- sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device includes: in response to the fourth operation, sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method, with the first Display the effect of the multimedia file.
- the n templates include the first editing template and the second editing template associated with the multimedia file
- the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect and the multimedia file with the second display effect are further included; or, in the first The sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface further include the multimedia file, the multimedia file having the first display effect displayed in a dynamic playback mode, and the multimedia file having the second display effect.
- a multimedia file or, on the first sharing interface and/or on the second sharing interface, dynamically display the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect, and the multimedia file with the The multimedia file of the second display effect; wherein, the first display effect corresponds to the first editing template, and the second display effect corresponds to the second editing template.
- the above display method uses static display and/or dynamic preview to present a vivid display effect for the user, which is convenient for the user to compare different display effects, thereby selecting the desired photo to share, and improving the user experience.
- the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface further include a control
- the method further includes: On the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, a sixth operation acting on the control is detected, and in response to the sixth operation, each of the n templates is displayed as being selected and, when the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia file is also displayed as being selected; or, when the When the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface include the multimedia files with different display effects, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia files with different display effects are all displayed as being selected .
- a joint sharing solution is provided for users. Users can quickly select all files related to photo 1 through the joint sharing control, such as original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files. All associated files are used as files to be shared and shared with the receiving device. This method can avoid the omission of files in the sharing process, facilitate sharing the shooting process and production process of photo 1 with the receiving device, and improve user experience.
- the method further includes: receiving a seventh operation of the user, and in response to the seventh operation, enabling the shooting guidance of the sending end device function, the shooting guidance function enables the sending end device to generate a shooting template according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of shooting the multimedia file, and/or, during the process of editing the multimedia file, An edit template is generated based on one or more edit parameters.
- the method for sharing multimedia files can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos;
- an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
- the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
- users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
- multimedia files such as photos and videos
- the sharing of the shooting process and editing process can be realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guide file
- the shooting parameters included in the guide file guide the shooting process and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared.
- the purpose of sharing is more precise.
- the second aspect provides a method for sharing multimedia files, which is characterized in that it is applied to a receiving device that includes a display screen, and the method includes: when m templates sent by the sending device are detected, displaying on the display screen A prompt window is displayed on the top, and the prompt window is used to prompt the user to select whether to receive the m templates, each of the m templates is associated with the first multimedia file, and each of the m templates
- the template includes one or more parameters that make the first multimedia file have different display effects, the first multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips, and m is greater than or equal to An integer of 1; in the prompt window, it is detected that the user allows the first operation of receiving the m templates, in response to the first operation, receiving and acquiring the m templates, and in the prompt window displaying the m templates; detecting a second operation of selecting a target template in the prompt window, and determining the target template in response to the second operation; determining the target template according to the type and preset relationship of the target template
- the receiving end device receives the "m templates” sent by the sending end device and parses the "m templates".
- m templates include shooting guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos
- the current shooting process can be guided according to one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting guidance file, and/or, when m templates include photos , video and other multimedia files, you can make interesting multimedia files according to one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the above process realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can follow the shooting guide file.
- the shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which improves the user experience.
- the m templates include a preset template; and/or, the m templates include a shooting template, and the shooting template includes the associated One or more shooting parameters of the first multimedia file, the shooting parameters include focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure , one or more of sensitivity; and/or, the m templates include an editing template, and the editing template includes one or more editing parameters of the associated first multimedia file, so
- the editing parameters include operating parameters for the user to perform editing processing on the first multimedia file, and the editing processing includes cropping, adjusting filter color, adjusting beauty parameters, adjusting brightness levels, labeling processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing , one or more of watermark processing.
- the one or more applications associated with the target template include the One or more apps with camera functionality.
- the shooting template when the shooting template is associated with a camera application, the camera application is invoked and a first shooting preview interface is displayed, and the first shooting preview interface including a screen displayed based on one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting template; when the shooting template is associated with multiple applications with a shooting function, in response to the third operation, calling the target application and displaying A second shooting preview interface, where the second shooting preview interface includes images displayed based on one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting template.
- the method further includes: detecting a fourth operation for shooting on the first shooting preview interface or the second shooting preview interface, in response to the fourth operation, based on the One or more shooting parameters, shooting to obtain a second multimedia file, so that the second multimedia file and the first multimedia file have the same shooting effect, and the second multimedia file is Any of photos, GIFs, or video clips.
- the one or more applications associated with the target template include the One or more applications with multimedia file editing functions.
- the gallery application when the editing template is associated with a gallery application, the gallery application is invoked and a first list interface is displayed, and the first list interface includes a or multiple multimedia files; or, when the editing template is associated with multiple applications with multimedia file editing functions, in response to the third operation, calling the target application and displaying a second list interface, the second list
- the interface includes one or more multimedia files; and, the method further includes: detecting a fifth operation of selecting a third multimedia file on the first list interface or the second list interface, in response to the first list interface or the second list interface The fifth operation is to automatically edit the third multimedia file according to one or more editing parameters included in the editing template, and display and save the edited third multimedia file.
- the method further includes: detecting that the first multimedia file sent by the sending end device has a different display effect the first multimedia file; in response to the first operation, receiving and displaying the first multimedia file and/or the first multimedia with different display effects in the prompt window document.
- the method for sharing multimedia files can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos;
- an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
- the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
- the user manually chooses to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
- multimedia files such as photos and videos
- video and other multimedia files at the same time, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process is realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guidance file
- the included shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared.
- the purpose of sharing is more precise.
- the embodiment of the present application can realize the online preview and storage of the video of multi-scene shooting, and can generate multiple video clips and each video clip associated with each scene in one shot.
- One or more of the original file, the intermediate file, the final file, the shooting guidance file, and the editing guidance file enrich the shooting experience and provide users with great convenience.
- the third aspect provides an electronic device, which may be a sending end device, and the electronic device includes: a touch screen; one or more processors; one or more memories; a module installed with multiple application programs; The memory stores one or more programs, and the one or more programs include instructions.
- the electronic device executes the electronic device according to any one of the first aspect and the first aspect. The method that can be executed by the sending end device is described above.
- the fourth aspect provides an electronic device, which may be a receiving end device, and the electronic device includes: a touch screen; one or more processors; one or more memories; a module installed with multiple application programs; One or more programs are stored in the memory, and the one or more programs include instructions.
- the electronic device executes the electronic device according to any one of the second aspect and the second aspect. A method that can be performed by a receiving end device is described.
- a fifth aspect provides a system, the system includes a sending end device and a receiving end device capable of communicating with each other, and the sending end device is capable of executing the method described in any one of the first aspect and the implementation manner of the first aspect.
- the receiver device can execute the method according to any one of the second aspect and the implementation manners of the second aspect.
- the sixth aspect provides a graphical user interface system on an electronic device, the electronic device has a touch screen, one or more memories, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used to execute the One or more computer programs in the one or more memories, the graphical user interface system includes that when the electronic device executes the method performed by the sending end device as described in any one of the first aspect and the first aspect, the The graphical user interface displayed by the sender device.
- the seventh aspect provides a graphical user interface system on an electronic device, the electronic device has a touch screen, one or more memories, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used to execute the One or more computer programs in the one or more memories, the graphical user interface system includes when the electronic device executes the method performed by the receiving end device according to any one of the second aspect and the second aspect, the Graphical user interface displayed by the receiver device.
- An eighth aspect provides an apparatus, which is included in an electronic device, and the electronic device may be a sending end device or a receiving end device.
- the apparatus When the electronic device is a sender device, the apparatus has a function of implementing the behavior of the sender device in the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
- the apparatus when the electronic device is a receiving end device, the apparatus has a function of implementing the behavior of the receiving end device in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect above.
- the functions of the device may be realized by hardware, or may be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware.
- Hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions described above. For example, a display module or unit, a detection module or unit, a processing module or unit, etc.
- a ninth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect. Any possible method for sharing multimedia files, or causing the electronic device to execute any possible method for sharing multimedia files as in the second aspect and the second aspect.
- the tenth aspect provides a computer program product.
- the electronic device When the computer program product is run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the first aspect or any one of the possible methods for sharing multimedia files in the first aspect, or to make the The electronic device executes any one of the possible methods for sharing multimedia files as in the second aspect and the second aspect.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of a process of setting a shooting guidance function provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo taking process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of photo editing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of the photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a receiving device receiving a file provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sharing multimedia files provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the "sending device” and “receiving device” can be mobile phones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, laptops, Ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), netbook, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA) and other electronic equipment.
- augmented reality augmented reality, AR
- virtual reality virtual reality
- VR virtual reality
- UMPC Ultra-mobile personal computer
- PDA personal digital assistant
- the "sending device” and the “receiving device” may be the same type of device, for example, both the “sending device” and the “receiving device” are mobile phones; or, the "sending device” and the “receiving device” “ can be different types of devices, for example, the “sending device” is a mobile phone, and the “receiving device” can be a tablet, etc.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the "receiving device” and the “sending device” may have the same structure, for example, both have the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1; or, the "receiving device” may include the electronic device shown in FIG. More or less structures of the device 100, the “sending device” may include more or less structures of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 , which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, and an antenna 1.
- Antenna 2 mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
- SIM subscriber identification module
- the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
- the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
- the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components.
- the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
- the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
- application processor application processor, AP
- modem processor graphics processing unit
- GPU graphics processing unit
- image signal processor image signal processor
- ISP image signal processor
- controller memory
- video codec digital signal processor
- DSP digital signal processor
- baseband processor baseband processor
- neural network processor neural-network processing unit, NPU
- the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
- the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
- a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
- the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
- the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
- the electronic device 100 may serve as both a sending end device and a receiving end device.
- the processor 110 of the electronic device 100 stores computer programs or instructions corresponding to the method for sharing multimedia files.
- the sending end device can record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
- the sending device can generate a shooting guidance file according to one or more shooting parameters, and/or, when the user takes photos, videos and other multimedia files During the editing process, an editing guidance file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
- the sending device shares multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, it can support the original files associated with photos, videos and other multimedia files manually selected by the user, intermediate files with different display effects, and shooting guidance files according to the user's sharing needs. and editing guide files, etc., and send them to the receiving end device.
- the processor 110 can detect and parse the "one or more templates” template".
- one or more templates include shooting guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos
- the current shooting process can be guided according to one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting guidance file, and/or, when one or more
- a template includes editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos
- interesting multimedia files can be produced according to one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves the use of users. experience.
- the above process realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can follow the shooting guide file.
- the shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which improves the user experience.
- processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
- the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
- I2C integrated circuit
- I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
- PCM pulse code modulation
- PCM pulse code modulation
- UART universal asynchronous transmitter
- MIPI mobile industry processor interface
- GPIO general-purpose input and output
- subscriber identity module subscriber identity module
- SIM subscriber identity module
- USB universal serial bus
- the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
- processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
- the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flashlight, the camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
- the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
- the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
- the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal.
- the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
- the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
- a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
- the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function.
- the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
- the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
- MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc.
- the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through the CSI interface to realize the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
- the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100 .
- the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
- the USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
- the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
- the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
- the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
- the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
- the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
- the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
- the charging management module 140 may receive a wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
- the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
- the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
- the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
- the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 .
- the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
- the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
- the mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G applied on the electronic device 100 .
- the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
- the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
- the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves and radiate them through the antenna 1 .
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 .
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
- a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
- the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal.
- the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
- the low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor.
- the application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 .
- the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In some other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
- the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100.
- System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
- frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
- near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
- infrared technology infrared, IR
- the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
- the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
- the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
- the sending end device and the receiving end device are two different electronic devices, both of which may include the wireless communication module 160 .
- the sending device and the receiving device can be devices connected to the same Wi-Fi network, and the two devices can communicate based on a Wi-Fi link; or, a Bluetooth connection can be established between the two devices Connection, two devices can communicate based on Bluetooth channel; or, two devices can establish a connection based on NFC technology such as touch; or, two devices can be based on infrared technology (infrared, IR) , 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G and other wireless communication methods to establish a connection.
- the two devices can communicate in a corresponding manner.
- the communication method is not limited.
- any of the possible connection methods between the devices listed above can make the sending end
- the device actively searches for one or more nearby near-field devices, and the user can select the target device that wants to share one or more templates from one or more near-field devices, that is, the receiving end device.
- the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
- the electronic device can be equipped with a chip with ultra wide-band (ultra wide-band, UWB) wireless sensing capabilities, etc., so that multiple electronic devices can perceive other electronic devices that exist nearby. device and identify the type of the electronic device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- UWB ultra wide-band
- the electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor.
- the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
- Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
- the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
- the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
- the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the electronic device 100 cooperates with modules such as the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor, and then displays images, application interfaces, controls, icons, window, etc., to realize the display function of the electronic device 100 .
- both the sending end device and the receiving end device may include a display screen 194, and the display screen 194 may display different interface contents and may receive user's touch operation.
- the touch operation can be passed to the processor 110, and according to the instructions of the processor 110, enter the sharing process.
- the flow of photos, and the display screen 194 of the sending device can display a photo sharing interface, for example, the user can select the file to be shared, the sharing method, the interface of the receiving device, etc.
- the receiving device may display a prompt window on the display screen 194 and detect operations performed by the user in the prompt window.
- the receiving end device can call and run the camera application according to the shooting guidance file, and display a possible camera preview interface on the display screen 194, and automatically follow the shooting guidance file.
- One or more shooting parameters display the current picture, which will not be repeated here.
- the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
- the electronic device 100 can start the shooting function of the camera by running the camera application, and display the preview screen of the shooting on the camera application interface, and the user can click the shooting shutter button to obtain the photo and save the photo In the local photo album, I won't repeat them here.
- the ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
- the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
- ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color.
- ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
- the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
- Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
- the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
- the photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
- the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
- DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
- the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the camera 193 may include a front camera and a rear camera, or one or more types of cameras such as a wide-angle camera, a macro camera, a depth-of-field camera, and a portrait camera.
- the number and types of cameras 193 used in the shooting process of the electronic device 100 are not limited.
- Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
- Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
- the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
- the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
- MPEG moving picture experts group
- the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
- NN neural-network
- Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
- the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
- the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other files in the external memory card.
- the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
- the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
- the internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
- the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
- the storage data area can store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) and the like.
- the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
- the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
- the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
- the audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
- the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
- Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
- Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the receiver 170B can be placed close to the human ear to receive the voice.
- the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
- the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
- the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
- the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
- the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
- the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
- the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
- the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
- the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
- the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
- the electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
- Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
- the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
- the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
- the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
- the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
- the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
- the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy.
- Touch sensor 180K also known as "touch panel”.
- the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
- the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
- the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
- Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 .
- the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
- the touch sensor 180K can detect user operations such as touch and click, generate an operation event, and transmit the operation event to the processor 110, and the processor 110 determines that the operation event includes touching Point coordinates, touch status and other related parameters, and respond according to the operation event.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
- the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
- the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
- the electronic device 100 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
- the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
- the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
- the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
- the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
- the SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
- the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
- the embodiment of the present application will take the Android system with layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100.
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the layered architecture of the system can include several layers, each layer has a clear role and division of labor, and the layers communicate through software interfaces.
- the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces.
- the Android system from top to bottom is respectively an application program layer, an application program framework layer, an Android runtime (Android runtime) and a system library, and a kernel layer and a network transport layer.
- the application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
- the application program package may include application programs such as camera, music, photo album, and settings.
- the user can take photos, animations, video clips and other multimedia files through the camera application, and the photos, animations, video clips and other multimedia files taken can be saved in the photo album application (or gallery application).
- the "camera application” in the embodiment of the present application may be a camera application configured in the factory of the electronic device, which may include different shooting modes such as taking pictures, video recording, and dual-view recording, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- implementation process of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may depend on the ability of the sending device to record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
- the capability of acquiring relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters in this embodiment of the present application may be a system capability of the electronic device, and the capability can be invoked by a camera application, an album application, and the like.
- the camera application may record one or more shooting parameters of the shooting process
- the album application may record one or more editing parameters of the editing process.
- the camera application is configured with the ability to obtain relevant shooting parameters
- the photo album application is configured with the ability to record one or more editing parameters in the editing process, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
- the application framework layer includes some predefined functions. As shown in Figure 2, the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a resource manager, a notification manager, etc., as well as a camera service (camera service) module involved in the embodiment of the present application.
- the window manager is used to manage window programs.
- the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
- Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
- Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
- the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on.
- the view system can be used to build applications.
- a display interface can consist of one or more views.
- the display including the icon of the camera application on the mobile phone interface may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
- the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
- the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
- the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc.
- the notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
- prompting text information in the status bar issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
- the camera service module of the embodiment of the present application may specifically include submodules such as a parameter acquisition module, a parameter storage module, and a file generation module, so as to realize the shooting guidance function of the embodiment of the present application.
- the parameter acquisition module can be used to acquire one or more shooting parameters corresponding to any multimedia file such as photos, animations, and video clips.
- the parameter acquisition module can obtain focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure , One or more parameters in Sensitivity. And/or, obtain one or more editing parameters related to the editing process performed by the user, such as trimming ratio, adjusting filter color, adjusting beautification parameters, and adjusting brightness level, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the parameter storage module can store one or more shooting parameters, one or more editing parameters and the like.
- the file generation module can generate a shooting guidance file according to one or more shooting parameters in the shooting process. And, according to one or more editing parameters in the process of editing and processing multimedia files such as photos and videos by the user, an editing guidance file is generated.
- the shooting guidance file, editing guidance file, etc. can be called "template files", and one or more template files can be stored in the parameter storage module, and an association relationship with multimedia files such as photos and videos can be established.
- Android runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
- the core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
- the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
- the virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files.
- the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
- a system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (media libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
- the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
- the media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc.
- the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
- the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
- 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
- the image processing library can provide analysis for various image data and provide a variety of image processing algorithms, such as image cutting, image fusion, image blurring, image sharpening, etc., which will not be repeated here.
- any application interface (such as any interface during the use of the camera application) is displayed on the display screen of the electronic device, it can be based on the view system, the two-dimensional graphics engine, and the three-dimensional graphics processing library , image processing library, etc., sequentially perform image rendering, synthesis, layer processing, etc. of the application interface, and finally display the corresponding interface on the display screen.
- the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
- the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, bluetooth driver and so on.
- the network transmission layer may include communication modules such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi, which are used to establish Bluetooth transmission channels, Wi-Fi transmission channels, etc., to realize file transmission between the sending end device and the receiving end device.
- communication modules such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi, which are used to establish Bluetooth transmission channels, Wi-Fi transmission channels, etc., to realize file transmission between the sending end device and the receiving end device.
- the driver at the kernel layer calls the corresponding hardware module.
- the Bluetooth The driver invokes the Bluetooth chip to make the Bluetooth module enter the working state, and establish a Bluetooth connection based on the Bluetooth communication module of the network transport layer.
- the sending end device and the receiving end device can transmit "one or more templates" based on multiple possible transmission methods such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. It is understood that the following embodiments of the present application will take the mobile phone and tablet with the structure shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 as examples, the mobile phone as the sending end device, and the tablet as the receiving end device. The method for sharing multimedia files is described in detail.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface (GUI) for setting a shooting guidance function provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- GUI graphical user interface
- the main interface 301 may include a top status bar area and an interface display area, and the top status bar area may display the operator logo, wireless local area network (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network) signal logo, mobile phone power logo and current time and other one or more content, the interface display area A weather clock component and various applications (applications, Apps) installed on the mobile phone are shown.
- the application programs may include phone, message, gallery, camera, and the like. It should be understood that the main interface 301 may also include other more content or display more application programs, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit the content displayed on the main interface of the mobile phone.
- the user performs the operation shown in (a) in FIG. 3, clicks the icon of the camera application, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone can display the main interface 302 of the camera application as shown in (b) in FIG. 3 .
- the main interface 302 of the camera application can also be called a "shooting preview interface", in which different images and frames can be presented, and the presented images and frames are called “preview images” or "preview frames”.
- the shooting preview interface 302 may include a navigation area at the bottom, a display area of a preview image in the middle, and a menu area at the top.
- the bottom navigation area displays a shooting shutter control 31, a local photo album control 32 and a camera switching control 33, and also shows a night scene , portrait, photo, video, professional and other shooting mode controls;
- the display area of the preview screen in the middle is used to display the image or screen captured by the current mobile phone camera;
- the top menu area can display one or more controls, such as the flash automatic control control 34.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number or types of controls displayed in each area. For simplicity, different functions of each control are not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application.
- the user can perform the operation shown in (b) in Figure 3, click the camera setting control 36, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone can display the image shown in (c) in Figure 3 camera setting interface 303 .
- the camera setting interface 303 displays a variety of setting options related to the shooting process, such as photo ratio options (for example, setting the photo ratio to [4:3]), voice-activated camera options, smiley face capture options, etc. setting options, as well as video resolution options (for example, set the video aspect ratio to [16:9], video resolution to 1080p), video frame rate options and other setting options related to recording video, as well as reference line options, timing shooting options and other common setting options, the embodiment of this application does not repeat the function of each option.
- photo ratio options for example, setting the photo ratio to [4:3]
- voice-activated camera options for example, set the video aspect ratio to [16:9], video resolution to 1080p
- video resolution options for example, set the video aspect ratio to [16:9], video resolution to 1080p
- the embodiment of the present application may add a "Shooting Guidance” option in the options related to the general settings, and the user can manually enable the shooting guidance function provided by the embodiment of the present application by switching the "Shooting Guidance” option.
- the "shooting guidance” option may also be added to other options or menus, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the user performs operation 1 as shown in FIG. 3 (c), and clicks the switch corresponding to the "shooting guidance” option.
- the mobile phone has turned on the function of shooting guidance; then perform operation 2 as shown in (c) in Figure 3, and click the "Return” control.
- the mobile phone can return to the shooting preview interface, as shown The interface 304 shown in (d) of FIG. 3 .
- the top menu in the interface 304 shown in (d) in FIG. 3 may display the shooting guidance control 37, and the display style of the shooting guidance control 37 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the developer may configure the shooting guidance control 37 to always be displayed in the shooting preview interface, and the shooting preview interface may always be displayed as shown in FIG. 3 As shown in the figure (d), the user can click the shooting guidance control 37 to quickly start the camera application shooting guidance function, making the operation process more convenient.
- the shooting guidance control 37 may have different display states, for example: gray or a non-working state with superimposed arrow marks, or a black or working state without arrow marks.
- the display mode of the shooting guidance control 37 can refer to the display of controls such as the automatic flashlight control control 34 and the AI shooting control 35. The user can click the shooting guidance control 37 to switch between different display states.
- the developer may configure the shooting guidance function to be enabled by default.
- the developer can configure the function of shooting guidance as the preset function of the mobile phone system, the preset function of the camera application, or the preset function of the associated gallery application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application .
- This method does not require additional operations by the user to enable the shooting guidance function, thereby simplifying the user's operations.
- the function of the shooting guide is configured as the preset function of the electronic device, it has been authorized by the user, that is, multiple associated applications such as the authorized camera application and the gallery application can call the function of the shooting guide.
- multiple associated applications such as the authorized camera application and the gallery application can call the function of the shooting guide.
- the embodiment does not limit this.
- the embodiment of the present application can also support the user to turn off the preset function through the setting control of the camera application; or turn off the preset function through a certain menu or control of the gallery application ; Or, turn off the default function through the menu related to the system-level setting application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the user can take or create multimedia files such as photos, dynamic pictures (moving pictures), and video clips through the camera application.
- the user in the process of taking photos, can manually adjust one or more shooting parameters according to his own shooting needs, for example, the user can perform a function such as adjusting the focal length, switching cameras, and adjusting the beauty level, etc. or multiple operations to adjust the corresponding shooting parameters.
- Table 1 lists various possible user operations and shooting parameters that can be adjusted by the user operations. As shown in Table 1, the user can perform one or more operations listed in Table 1, and each user operation can act on a different object, thereby modifying the actual shooting parameters of the current shooting.
- the user can modify the zoom mode in the process of taking photos according to the motion state of the subject, such as single auto focus (auto focus single, AF-S) mode, continuous focus, etc.
- AF-S mode can be used to shoot static subjects
- AF-C mode can be used to focus on continuous moving subjects
- MF mode can be used to shoot unpredictable moving subjects, etc.
- Users can combine different shooting needs to set different Zoom mode, shooting different objects in different zoom modes, corresponding to different focal length parameters.
- the mobile phone can provide the user with different levels of 0-10 Beautification level, different beautification levels can correspond to different beautification parameters such as skin color, skin texture, smoothness, etc., which will not be repeated here.
- the "user's meta-operation" described above can occur before shooting, for example, before shooting, the user sets the resolution of the photo, the ratio of the photo, the size of the storage space occupied by the photo, etc.
- the one or more user operations can occur during shooting, for example, when the user is shooting, the beautification function can be turned on to adjust the beautification level of the current shooting.
- the user may switch multiple cameras such as the front camera and the rear camera during the video recording process, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit the occurrence timing of the "user's meta-operation".
- the mobile phone as an intelligent electronic device, can automatically adjust one or more shooting parameters involved in the shooting process in combination with the current shooting environment, and/or based on intelligent software algorithms, etc. .
- the mobile phone can automatically focus on the subject; or, the mobile phone detects the shooting environment, and can automatically adjust the shooting brightness during the night when the shooting environment is dark; or, various AI of the mobile phone Capability items such as recognition can automatically adjust related parameters, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the types of parameters that can be automatically adjusted by the mobile phone.
- operation objects all possible “objects that cause changes in the display effect of the photographed photos” are called “operation objects", and the “operation objects” can include those initiated by the user or automatically adjusted by the mobile phone. And each operation object can lead to a change of shooting parameters, which in turn causes a difference in the display effect of the captured photos. In the introduction of subsequent embodiments, it will not be distinguished whether the "operation object" is initiated by the user or caused by the intelligent operation of the electronic device.
- Table 2 lists a variety of operation objects, the display effect corresponding to each operation object, the applicable shooting mode, and the timing that can be adjusted or modified.
- each type of operation object that causes a change in the effect of the captured photo may correspond to a different timing for adjustment or modification.
- the user can be supported to adjust before taking the photo, but not during the shooting process; for the lens, the user can be supported to select before taking the photo, and it can also support switching during the shooting, No more details here.
- Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo taking process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the mobile phone may display an interface 402 as shown in (b) of FIG. 4 . Then execute the operation shown in (b) figure in Figure 4, click the control 38 of the beauty function, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone opens the beauty function related to shooting, and displays (c) in Figure 4 ) shown in the interface 403, in this interface 403, different beauty levels from 1 to 10 are displayed, and the user can manually select the desired beauty level. For example, the user adjusts the corresponding beauty level when taking a photo as 8 grades.
- the preview image displayed on the current shooting preview interface 404 (including "adult And the child” screen) has the display effect after "1.5 ⁇ " magnification and 8 levels of beauty treatment.
- the user can also manually set more display effects, such as adding different filters, adding different widgets, icons, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the user performs the operation shown in (d) of Figure 4, clicks the shooting shutter control 31, and responds to the user's shooting operation, the mobile phone obtains the current preview image with "1.5 ⁇ " magnification and 8 levels of beauty treatment, and Save this preview image to your local camera roll as a captured photo.
- the captured photos may be displayed in the local photo album control 31 in the form of thumbnails, which will not be repeated here.
- magnification of "1.0 ⁇ " and "1.5 ⁇ ” can be understood as the display effect of the preview image in the shooting preview interface described from the user's perspective.
- Different magnifications can correspond to different focal lengths. When users use different focal lengths to take photos, different display effects can be presented to users, which will not be repeated in the future.
- the camera application can record the process of the user taking a photo, obtain the shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, and can generate a "shooting guidance file" according to the shooting parameters corresponding to the photo.
- the shooting parameters corresponding to each photo may include one or more shooting parameters manually adjusted by the user, one or more shooting parameters automatically adjusted by the mobile phone, etc. Displays parameters related to effect changes.
- each operation object in Table 2 may correspond to, the content listed in Table 3 may be divided into “operation objects before shooting” and “operation objects during shooting”.
- users can be supported to adjust before shooting, and users can also be supported to adjust during shooting.
- operation objects such as resolution and address location
- users are only allowed to adjust before shooting, and users are not supported to adjust during shooting. Therefore, operation objects such as resolution and address location can only be included in the "operation objects before shooting" , will not be repeated here.
- the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting may be included at the same time.
- the shooting parameters before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting may include the same parameter type.
- the shooting parameters before shooting and shooting parameters corresponding to a certain photo include the same type of parameters at the same time, the final parameters corresponding to the display effect presented to the user may prevail.
- the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting all include "beauty level parameters", then the beauty level can be the beauty level before shooting, the beauty level during shooting
- the final beautification level corresponding to the display effect presented to the user after superimposition shall prevail, and shall be saved in the "shooting guidance file", which is not limited in the embodiment of the application.
- the user can also perform an editing operation on the photo, or in other words, the photo can be edited by the user.
- the user may perform one or more editing operations such as trimming the ratio of the photo, adjusting the filter color of the photo, and adjusting the beauty level. For example, after the shooting is completed, the user can modify the beauty level of the photo, and/or adjust the brightness of the photo, and/or add a filter color to the photo, etc.
- editing parameters when a user performs an editing operation on a photo, all parameters related to the display effect of the photo, or parameters that may change the display effect of the photo are called "editing parameters”.
- the gallery application of the mobile phone may record all editing parameters involved in the process of editing the photo by the user, and generate an "editing guidance file" according to the editing parameters.
- Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of photo editing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the user can execute the Operation, click the local photo album control 32 on the interface 501, in response to the user's click operation, the mobile phone displays the details interface 502 of photo 1 as shown in (b) figure in Figure 5, and the image of photo 1 is displayed on the interface 502 , and options for multiple user-performable actions such as Share, Favorite, Edit, Delete, and more.
- the user clicks on the edit option and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone displays an editing interface 503 as shown in (c) figure in Figure 5, on which the image of photo 1 is displayed on the editing interface 503, as well as trimming, filter, adjustment and modification.
- operation object in Table 4 may be manually selected and triggered by the user after the user clicks the "Edit” option on the interface 502, or automatically started and triggered by the mobile phone, and each editing operation Manipulating objects can cause changes in the display effect of photos.
- the editing operations may be continuous editing operations.
- the photo for the second edited process can be based on the photo 1 obtained after the first edited process
- the third editing process can be performed on the basis of the photo 1 obtained after the second editing process.
- the photo 1 after the second editing process can overwrite and replace the photo 1 obtained after the first editing process
- the third editing process can cover and replace the photo 1 obtained after the second editing process
- the local mobile phone Only the photo 1 obtained after the third editing process is kept in the album, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the editing operation may be a separate editing operation performed repeatedly on the original file.
- photo 1 undergoes the first editing process to obtain intermediate file 1
- the second editing process is performed on the original photo 1 to obtain intermediate file 2
- the third editing process is also performed on the original captured photo 1 to obtain Intermediate file 3
- intermediate file 1 intermediate file 2, and intermediate file 3 are independent, and there is no superposition or replacement relationship between parameters, and can all be stored in the local photo album of the mobile phone, which is not limited in this embodiment of the application.
- the original photo 1 that has been taken without any editing process can be called the “original file” of the photo 1
- the photo 1 that has been edited for the first time can be called the “original file” of the photo 1.
- Intermediate file 1" the photo 1 obtained by the second editing process is called the “intermediate file 2" of the photo 1
- the "intermediate file 1” and “intermediate file 2" of the photo 1 can also be saved in In the local photo album of the mobile phone, the photo 1 obtained through the third editing process is called the "final file” of the photo 1, and details will not be described later.
- the gallery application of the mobile phone can record as shown in Table 5.
- One or more editing parameters of the photo 1 are shown, and an editing guidance file of the photo 1 is generated according to the one or more editing parameters.
- Table 5 can be the editing parameters corresponding to one editing process. If the photo 1 has undergone the first editing process, the second editing process and the third editing process, then each editing process can include the parameters shown in Table 5. One or more editing parameters shown will not be repeated here.
- each photo taken by the user on the mobile phone can generate a unique corresponding "shooting guidance file" after the user takes the photo, and if the photo is edited and processed by the user, one or more "Editorial Guidance Document".
- a photo may include the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting, the shooting parameters during shooting, and the editing parameters listed in Table 4 or Table 5, and the shooting parameters before shooting Parameters, shooting parameters in shooting, editing parameters may include the same parameter type.
- the shooting parameters corresponding to a certain photo include parameters of the same type at the same time, the final parameters corresponding to the display effect presented to the user may prevail.
- the shooting parameters before shooting, shooting parameters during shooting, and editing parameters listed in Table 3 all include “beauty level parameters", then the beauty level can be the beauty level before shooting, during shooting Superimposition of the beauty level of the photo, record and save the beauty level parameters in the "shooting guidance file" of the photo; when the user performs an editing operation and adjusts the beauty level of the photo, the editing parameters related to the editing operation can be saved In the "Editing Guidance Document", this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
- a shooting guidance file for the photo can be generated.
- the photo is downloaded by the user from the network or server, or the photo is received by the mobile phone from other users, then when the photo is saved to the local album, one or more shooting parameters of the photo can be detected to generate the photo "Shooting Instructions Document" for photos.
- the time to generate the "editing guidance file" of the photo may be when the user performs an editing operation and saves the editing operation.
- the user can perform one or more editing operations on a photo.
- the editing "save" control can save the editing operation performed by the user, update the editing parameters, and overwrite the "save” control of the photo.
- Editing Guidance File or, the mobile phone may detect each editing operation performed by the user, and generate and save a new editing guidance file for one or more editing parameters of each editing operation.
- each photo may correspond to one or more editing guidance files, in other words, the one or more editing guidance files are all associated with the photo.
- each photo can be associated or bound with the photo's "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” in various possible ways.
- each photo may be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” of the photo through the file name.
- a unique hash value is generated for each photo to associate or bind with the photo's "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file”.
- the key value preset for each photo is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or “editing guidance file” of the photo, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- Table 6 lists the manners of associating or binding multiple photos with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file”.
- the mobile phone can automatically generate a unique photo name for the photo, such as IMG-2021-12-1. Then, the mobile phone can automatically generate the name of the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file of the photo according to the name of the photo and preset rules.
- the photo 1 taken by the user without any editing process is the "original file” of the photo 1, and the original file of the photo 1 corresponds to a shooting guidance file; the photo 1 obtained after the first editing process is the "original file” of the photo 1.
- the “intermediate file 1" of the photo 1 the photo 1 obtained by the second editing process is called the “intermediate file 2" of the photo 1, and the photo 1 obtained by the third editing process is the "final file” of the photo 1.
- photo 2 may have a corresponding shooting guidance file: photo 2-D, and there is no corresponding editing guidance file, which is represented by "/" in Table 5.
- photo 3 is not taken by the user through the mobile phone, for example, photo 3 is a photo downloaded by the user from the network platform, but the user edits the photo 3, then when the user saves the photo 3 to the local album, the mobile phone can also detect and obtain The shooting parameters of the photo 3, and generate a shooting guidance file: photo 3-D; after one editing operation by the user, according to the editing parameters, generate the editing guidance file of the photo 3: photo 3-E.
- the user can share the photo selected by the user to the receiving device through the method provided in the embodiment of this application.
- the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to the photo is also shared with the receiving device, so that after receiving the file, the receiving device can take more photos with the same display effect according to the shooting guidance file of the photo, and/or , quickly obtain more photos with the same display effect according to the editing guidance file of the photo.
- the One or more files such as shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files related to the photos to be shared can be displayed to the user for the user to manually select one or more files to realize on-demand sharing.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the interface 601 shown in (a) of FIG. 6 shows the image of the photo 1 taken by the user in the foregoing embodiment, as well as multiple user-executable operations such as sharing, collecting, editing, deleting and more. options.
- the interface 602 can display thumbnails of one or more local photos such as photo 1 (including photos of "adults and children"), photo 2 (photos of faces), and other local photos.
- the photo 1 is the selected photo to be shared
- the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo 1 is selected by default
- the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo 2 is unselected.
- the interface 602 may display one or more of original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files related to the photo 1 to be shared in the form of a file list .
- the files corresponding to the photo 1 may include: shooting guidance file, editing guidance file 1, editing guidance file 2, editing guidance file 3, original file (photo 1 without any editing process) ), intermediate file 1 (photo 1 obtained through the first editing process), intermediate file 2 (photo 1 obtained through the second editing process), and final file (photo 1 obtained through the third editing process).
- the photo 1 is selected as the photo to be shared, the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo 1 is selected by default, and the "original file” in the file list corresponding to the photo 1 defaults to The selected state, that is, the "original file” control on the interface 602 is displayed as a checked state.
- only one editing guidance file may be displayed on the interface 602, and if the user selects the control of the one editing guidance file, That is, the editing instruction file 1, the editing instruction file 2, and the editing instruction file 3 of the photo 1 are selected at the same time.
- each editing guidance file may be independently displayed on the interface 602, for example, editing guidance file 1, editing guidance file 2, and editing guidance file 3 are displayed in a list form.
- the user can select one or more editing guidance files to be shared, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display method of the files.
- the user performs operation 1-operation 2-operation 3 as shown in (b) in Figure 6, clicks to select the shooting guidance file of the photo 1, edits the guidance file, and clicks the "Huawei Share” option, in response to the user's operation , the mobile phone determines that the original file, shooting guidance file, and editing guidance file (for example, including editing guidance file 1, editing guidance file 2, and editing guidance file 3) corresponding to the photo 1 will be used as "files to be shared", and the display is shown in Figure 6 In the interface 603 shown in (c) in figure, the icons and/or device names of one or more searched receiving end devices, such as P30, MateBook, etc., are further displayed for the user.
- the icons and/or device names of one or more searched receiving end devices such as P30, MateBook, etc.
- This interface 604 may display "MateBook is currently The prompt message "Receiving" reminds the user that the file is currently being transmitted, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of the photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the interface 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 7 please refer to the introduction of the aforementioned interface 601 , which will not be repeated here.
- the photo 1 is selected as the photo to be shared, and all files associated with the photo 1 to be shared can be displayed on the interface 702 shown in (b) in FIG. 7 , for example Various files such as original file, intermediate file 1, intermediate file 2, intermediate file 3...final file, shooting instruction file, editing instruction file 1, editing instruction file 2, and editing instruction file 3 associated with the photo 1.
- the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo 1 is selected by default, and the "original file” in the file list corresponding to the photo 1 is also selected by default , that is, the "Original File” control on the interface 702 is displayed as checked.
- the interface 702 can also display the original and intermediate files associated with the photo 1 in the form of thumbnails, and the original and intermediate files associated with the photo 1 can have different display effects for users to preview different display effect.
- three photos are displayed side by side on the interface 702 , each of which may correspond to a different static preview effect.
- a different static preview effect For example:
- the first photo is the shooting effect presented by the original file of photo 1: "adults and children" are displayed at a relatively long distance.
- the second picture is the display effect of photo 1 after the first editing process: After the user's first editing process, the size of photo 1 is cropped and modified.
- the third picture is the display effect of photo 1 after the first editing process and the second editing process: it is the same size as the second picture, and the filter color and brightness of the photo have been adjusted.
- the interface 702 when multiple display effects of the photo 1 are displayed on the interface 702, in addition to presenting the static preview picture in the form of multiple pictures as described above, it can also be played dynamically (for example, dynamically played in a marquee style).
- the format is that the user plays multiple intermediate files of the photo 1 to present a dynamic preview effect.
- photo 1 corresponds to multiple editing processes
- three photos can be displayed side by side on the interface 702
- the first photo can be the shooting effect presented by the original file of photo 1
- the second photo can present the preview effect of dynamic playback
- Dynamically play the photo 1 in the second photo to obtain the display effect of multiple intermediate files after multiple edits, such as intermediate file 1, intermediate file 2, intermediate file 3... with a cycle of t (for example, 2 seconds)
- t for example, 2 seconds
- the interface 702 displays 3 photos side by side that can also support online editing by the user, and present the preview effect of the online editing to the user for the user to view or modify editing parameters, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the user clicks the sharing option on the interface 801 shown in (a) of FIG. 8 , and the mobile phone displays the interface 802 shown in (b) of FIG. 8 .
- the interface 802 there may also be a "linkage share” control 802-1 displayed in a floating state, and the "linkage share” control 802-1 is used to quickly and quickly select a picture associated with photo 1 with one click. of all files.
- the user performs operation 1 as shown in (b) of FIG. 8, clicks on the "linkage sharing" control 802-1, and in response to the user's operation, the original file, intermediate file 1, Intermediate file 2, intermediate file 3...Shooting guidance file, editing guidance file 1, editing guidance file 2, editing guidance file 3...are all displayed as being selected.
- the user then performs operation 2 as shown in (b) in Figure 8, and clicks the "Huawei Share” option.
- the mobile phone determines the original file, intermediate file 1, intermediate file 2, and intermediate file of the photo 1. 3...
- Shooting guide file, editing guide file 1, editing guide file 2, editing guide file 3... are all regarded as "files to be shared”.
- the prompt message "MateBook is receiving" is displayed on the interface 804 of the screen, prompting the user that the file is currently being transmitted.
- the above display method provides users with a joint sharing solution. Users can quickly select all files related to photo 1 through the joint sharing control, such as original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files. All associated files are used as files to be shared and shared with the receiving device. This method can avoid the omission of files in the sharing process, facilitate sharing the shooting process and production process of photo 1 with the receiving device, and improve user experience.
- the "linkage sharing" control 802-1 can disappear automatically after the user clicks one button to quickly select all the files associated with the photo 1; For example, within 5 seconds) after no user operation on the "Linkage Sharing" control 802-1 is detected, it will automatically disappear; or, the "Linkage Sharing" control 802-1 can be permanently suspended and displayed on any one or the other side of the sharing process.
- the "Linkage Sharing" control 802-1 can be permanently suspended and displayed on any one or the other side of the sharing process.
- interfaces such as interface 802, interface 803, or interface 804, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- linkage may also be used to indicate a synchronization relationship between the photo 1 and the control where the file corresponding to the photo 1 is located.
- "linkage” may also be used to indicate a synchronization relationship between the photo 1 and the control where the file corresponding to the photo 1 is located.
- Editing guidance file 1, editing guidance file 2, editing guidance file 3... are all regarded as "files to be shared", and the control is in a selected state.
- the mobile phone can use the photos taken by the user and one or more A corresponding "shooting guidance file” is generated from the shooting parameters, and/or a corresponding "editing guidance file” is generated according to the editing parameters in the process of editing the photo by the user after the shooting is completed.
- the sending device can display one or more original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files related to the photo for the user.
- the ability to take photos and share photos in the embodiments of the present application may be system capabilities of electronic devices such as mobile phones.
- the system capabilities may be called by various application programs with shooting functions such as camera applications.
- the realization of the process of sharing photos can be based on the camera application configured when the mobile phone leaves the factory, and can also support users to download and install the beauty camera, Meipai and other arbitrary applications that can take photos to call this capability, or , can also be applied to application, Any application, such as an application, that has functions such as photo shooting and video recording, invokes this capability, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the shooting scenes provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be used for recording video scenes, dual-view shooting, multi-view shooting, portraits, videos, night scenes, professional and other different shooting modes or shooting scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- each shooting mode has its own particularity, but the shooting process, editing operation process and corresponding parameters can refer to the process of taking photos described above. All shooting modes can generate corresponding shooting guidance files.
- This application implements For example, the implementation process in different shooting modes will not be described in detail.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 shows the shooting preview interface 901 of the mobile phone, and the user switches the current shooting mode to the dual-view shooting mode.
- the "black small triangle” used to locate the current shooting mode icon” can point to the "Double View” mode control.
- two preview windows may be displayed: a preview window 901-1 and a preview window 901-2.
- pictures in different preview windows may come from different mobile phone cameras.
- the picture in the preview window 901-1 may come from the rear wide-angle camera of the mobile phone, which is used to shoot distant scenery, and the picture is called a "background flow” picture; the picture in the preview window 901-2
- the picture can come from the front camera of the mobile phone and is used to shoot close-ups of people's faces. This picture is called a "foreground stream" picture.
- the user can set different shooting parameters for the images in different preview windows.
- the images in each preview window can be independently based on the different parameters listed in Table 2 or Table 3. Number and/or different kinds of parameters are taken.
- the mobile phone After the user sets different shooting parameters for each preview window, perform the operation shown in (a) in Figure 9, click the shooting shutter control 31, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone can collect different images through different cameras. video frame, and record video clips based on the “background flow” frame and the “foreground flow” frame. Similarly, the user can click the shooting shutter control 31 again to end the recording process of the video segment, and save the recorded video segment locally.
- the mobile phone can generate the corresponding shooting parameters of each part of the screen according to the shooting parameters corresponding to each part of the image included in the video segment of the dual-view image.
- the video segment of the dual-view image can be understood as a combination of two parts of the image
- the files corresponding to the video segment of the dual-view image can include: a file of "background stream”, a file of "foreground stream” and " Foreground flow + background flow (full scene flow)" file.
- the file of "background flow” may include: one or more of original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files in the shooting process of "background flow”.
- "foreground flow” The same is true for the files of "foreground flow + background flow (full scene flow)".
- Each file can include different types and/or different numbers of parameters. Refer to the content of photo 1 introduced above. Let me repeat.
- the user performs an operation as shown in (b) in FIG. 9, clicks the local photo album control 32 on the shooting preview interface 902, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone displays an interface 903 as shown in (c) in FIG. 9 .
- the interface 903 shows the video segment of the dual-view image that has just been shot, as well as multiple user-executable operation options such as sharing, collecting, editing, deleting and more.
- the user performs the operation shown in (c) in Figure 9, clicks the sharing option, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone enters the process of sharing the video clip, and the interface shown in (d) in Figure 9 can be displayed 904.
- the interface 904 may display a cover thumbnail of the video segment of the dual-view image, and the selection box in the lower right corner of the cover thumbnail of the video segment defaults to In the selected state, the interface 904 also displays the cover thumbnails of the background stream and the foreground stream that are independently associated with the video clip, for example, the covers of 3 parallel video clips on this interface
- the thumbnails are shown, and the second cover thumbnail only includes the video frame captured by the background stream, and the third cover thumbnail only includes the video frame captured by the foreground stream.
- the interface 904 may also display options related to different streams and different pictures included in the video segment of the dual-view image to be shared, such as foreground stream options, background stream options, and full-scene stream options.
- each video segment displayed on the interface 904 may present a dynamic playback effect for the user in the display area of the cover thumbnail for the user to view the video effect, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the mobile phone When the user performs the operation shown in (d) in Figure 9 and clicks on the "background stream” option, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone will further display an interface 905 as shown in (e) in Figure 9,
- the interface 905 displays one or more files associated with the "background flow” picture, such as one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file, and editing guidance file associated with the "background flow” picture.
- the control where the original file associated with the "Background Flow" screen is located can be displayed as a selected state.
- the user performs operation 1-operation 2 as shown in (e) in Figure 9, selects the original file and shooting guidance file corresponding to the "background flow” screen as the file to be shared, and sends it to to the receiving end device (such as MateBook).
- the receiving end device such as MateBook
- the mobile phone will further display one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files associated with the "foreground flow” screen.
- the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files associated with the "foreground flow” screen There are many kinds, please refer to the above implementation process, and will not repeat them here.
- the mobile phone When the user clicks the "full scene flow” option, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone will take the dual-view photo of "foreground flow + background flow” as a whole merged photo, and the mobile phone will further display "foreground flow + background flow”
- the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file, and editing guidance file associated with the screen please refer to the above implementation process, and will not repeat them here.
- the shooting process and sharing process of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the dual-view shooting mode, and each picture in the video with dual-view pictures captured in the dual-view shooting mode can independently generate a shooting guidance file and/or edit guidance document.
- the user can choose to include the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to each screen, or the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to the video clip of the full-scene picture.
- the guide file is shared with the receiving end device, which enriches the application scenarios of this application, improves the utilization efficiency of each screen in the dual-view screen shooting to a certain extent, increases the available shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, and realizes shooting
- the sharing of process and editing process improves the user experience.
- the "multi-scene shooting" or “multi-stream shooting” in the embodiment of the present application may include displaying multiple pictures during the shooting process, such as the two shooting pictures shown in (a) of Figure 9 ; It can also include the multi-stream shooting scene generated by the operation of the user switching the camera midway when recording the video. In other words, when the mobile phone obtains images through different cameras, different shooting guidance files can be independently generated. storage, and will not be described in detail later.
- the files associated with the multi-stream video may include one of the following or Various:
- the video of the screen can be segmented at the timing when the user performs the pause operation, and multiple video clips corresponding to each screen can be temporarily saved document.
- the multi-stream video can be divided into multiple video segments, and each video segment can be associated with one or more files, for example, each video segment may include associated One or more of original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guide files and editing guide files.
- the complete video clip file composed of the whole scene stream is divided into multiple video clips, each video clip can be previewed online, and the user can select a satisfactory video clip and save it; the unsatisfactory video clip can be saved Manual deletion, or each video clip can be used as a temporary file, when the user saves the selected video clip, the unselected video clip can be deleted.
- a corresponding shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file may be generated for the saved video segment, and the corresponding file may be saved.
- users can also save multiple times, and each save can save different video clips; a certain video clip in multi-stream videos can also be saved multiple times in different scenarios, please refer to For the sake of brevity, the implementation process of saving photo 1 as intermediate file 1, intermediate file 2, intermediate file 3, etc. described above will not be repeated here.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation in the multi-stream video shooting scene.
- the above different implementation methods can make the process of shooting and sharing more flexible, allowing users to manually select and share one or more files related to shooting and editing according to their own shooting needs, providing users with more diverse and more Easy way to share.
- Fig. 6 to Fig. 9 Through the above-mentioned process of Fig. 6 to Fig. 9, it is introduced that the user selects multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared from the sending device, as well as the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and related multimedia files. Edit one or more files in the guidance file and share them with the receiving device, and the receiving device can receive the files shared by the sending device.
- multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared from the sending device, as well as the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and related multimedia files. Edit one or more files in the guidance file and share them with the receiving device, and the receiving device can receive the files shared by the sending device.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a receiving device receiving a file provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the tablet displays an unlocked main interface, on which one or more applications such as clock, calendar, gallery, memo, camera, music and settings can be displayed.
- a prompt window 1001-1 can automatically pop up on the main interface.
- An interface 1001 as shown in (a) of FIG. 10 is displayed.
- the detected file name can be displayed in the prompt window 1001-1, as well as a "receive” control, a “cancel” control, etc., and a prompt message can also be displayed in the prompt window 1001-1: whether to receive the file from the mobile phone ? .
- one or more file names sent by the mobile phone detected by the tablet are displayed after: original file (photo 1), shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) and Editorial guidance document (Photo 1-E).
- the original file (photo 1), shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) and editing guidance file (photo 1-E) displayed in the prompt window 1001-1 are selected.
- the user performs the operation shown in (a) in Figure 10, clicks the "receive" control, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet receives and parses one or more files to obtain the original file of the photo 1 (photo 1) , Shooting Guidance Document (Photo 1-D) and Editing Guidance Document (Photo 1-E).
- the tablet can analyze and obtain the parameter information contained in the original file of the photo 1, the shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) and the editing guidance file (photo 1-E), and the tablet can according to the file type, file name, parameter information The type and the like determine the function that the received file has.
- the tablet may further display an interface 1002 as shown in (b) of FIG. 10 , which includes a prompt window 1002-1 for prompting the user: View and use received files?
- the user can perform operation 1-operation 2 as shown in (b) in Figure 10, click on the option of the original file (photo 1) and the "OK" control, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can Display the details interface 1003 of the photo 1 as shown in (c) of FIG. 10 , so that the user can check the picture content of the photo 1 .
- a close control, a "return” control, an "edit” control, etc. can also be displayed on the interface 1003, and the user can click the close control, and the tablet can display an interface 1004 and prompts as shown in (d) of Figure 10 Window 1004-1 (may be the same as prompt window 1002-1), which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the user can perform operation 1-operation 2 as shown in (d) figure in FIG.
- the tablet can be associated with one or more locally installed applications with a shooting function.
- the user clicks the "OK” control as shown in (d) in Figure 10, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can directly start the camera application, and jump to display (f) in Figure 10
- the shooting preview interface 1006 of the shown camera application enables the user to shoot other pictures based on one or more shooting parameters included in the received shooting guidance file (photo 1-D).
- the tablet Automatically start the camera application, and automatically adjust the current shooting focal length to the focal length included in the shooting guidance file (photo 1-D), as shown in (f) in Figure 10, that is, to realize the sharing of the shooting process with the mobile phone to guide the current Shooting to take photos with user-desired effects.
- the tablet can display (e) in Figure 10
- a prompt message is displayed in the prompt window 1005-1 on the interface 1005:
- multiple applications such as Meipai, WeChat, and camera that have a shooting function on the tablet are displayed for the user, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the multiple applications that can be associated.
- the user can select the required application in the prompt window 1005-1, for example, click the icon of the camera application, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet jumps to display the shooting preview of the camera application as shown in (f) in Figure 10
- the interface 1006 enables the user to shoot other pictures based on one or more shooting parameters included in the received shooting guidance file (photo 1-D).
- the tablet in response to the user's operation, can start the gallery application, and jump to display the main interface 1008 of the gallery application as shown in (h) in Figure 10. Multiple photos, the user can select which photos to process (including "stepping man” photos).
- the user performs the operation shown in (h) in Figure 10, selects the target photo to be processed (including the photo of "the person who is stepping"), and in response to the user's selection operation, the tablet can automatically Based on one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file (photo 1-E) received, the target photo to be processed (including the photo of "the person stepping") is edited and processed, and displayed for the user as shown in Figure 10
- the details interface 1009 shown in (i) after the photo (including the photo of "the stepping person”) is automatically edited.
- the photos on the interface 1009 can automatically crop, add filters, etc. based on one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file (photo 1-E) Multiple editing processes listed in Table 4, and present the final processed display effect for the user.
- one or more templates received by the tablet can support the user to modify the parameters contained therein.
- one or more shooting parameters in the shooting guidance file, and/or one or more editing parameters in the editing guidance file can be manually modified by the user on the tablet.
- the user can press and hold the "Shooting Guidance File (Photo 1-D)" option to display an operation window, which can include viewing related Options such as parameter, delete, edit, and more allow users to operate according to their needs.
- the "Shooting Guidance File (Photo 1-D)" option to display an operation window, which can include viewing related Options such as parameter, delete, edit, and more allow users to operate according to their needs.
- the tablet can display an interface 1011 as shown in (k) figure in Figure 10.
- the shooting guidance file (photo 1) is displayed for the user.
- One or more parameters included in -D support the user to click on any parameter to modify, delete and other operations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the method for sharing multimedia files can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos;
- an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
- the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
- the user manually chooses to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
- multimedia files such as photos and videos
- video and other multimedia files at the same time, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process is realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guidance file
- the included shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared.
- the purpose of sharing is more precise.
- a linkage sharing method can also be provided for the user.
- Linkage sharing control quickly select all files related to multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, such as original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files, etc., and all associated files as to be shared
- the file is shared with the receiving end device. This method can avoid omissions in the sharing process and improve user experience.
- the embodiment of the present application can realize the online preview and storage of the video of multi-scene shooting, and can generate multiple video clips and each video clip associated with each scene in one shot.
- One or more of the original file, the intermediate file, the final file, the shooting guidance file, and the editing guidance file enrich the shooting experience and provide users with great convenience.
- the above-mentioned embodiment introduces the process of shooting multimedia files and the process of sharing multimedia files from the user interaction level in combination with FIG. 3 to FIG. 10 .
- the method implementation provided by the embodiment of the present application will be introduced below from the software implementation strategy level in conjunction with FIG. 11 process.
- this method can be implemented in different electronic devices with structures such as a display screen and one or more cameras as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2, such as implementing multimedia between two different electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets. file sharing.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sharing multimedia files provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the method 1100 can be divided into two stages, including:
- the first stage the sending end device (such as mobile phone) stage
- the first stage may be performed by the sender device, where one or more templates are stored in the sender device, and may specifically include the following steps:
- Detecting a first operation for sharing a multimedia file in response to the first operation, determining n templates associated with the multimedia file, and displaying a first sharing interface of the multimedia file, the first sharing
- the interface includes the multimedia files, the n templates, and one or more sharing methods.
- the multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips
- each of the n templates includes one or more parameters that make the multimedia file have different display effects
- n is An integer greater than or equal to 1.
- the "first operation” may be an operation in which the user clicks the option or control of "Share” on the details interface of the multimedia file.
- the "multimedia file" in the embodiment of the present application may be photos, animations or video clips taken by the user through the camera application of the electronic device, etc., or it may be a photo downloaded by the user from the network, server, social platform, etc. , moving pictures or video clips, etc., or received photos, moving pictures or video clips sent by other devices and stored locally on the electronic device, this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
- the electronic device can detect the photo and obtain shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, such as the brightness level of the photo , filter color and other shooting parameters, or obtain the editing parameters of the photo being edited and processed, which will not be repeated here.
- any multimedia file such as a photo, a moving picture, or a video clip may present different display effects when corresponding to different shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
- the sending end device stores multiple multimedia files and one or more templates associated with each multimedia file.
- a certain multimedia file is associated with n templates, and the n templates may include shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files associated with the multimedia file.
- the multimedia file may be a photo
- one or more templates associated with the photo may include: a shooting guide file, one or more editing guide files, and the like.
- the multimedia file may be a video segment, and one or more templates associated with the video segment may include: one or more shooting guidance files, one or more editing guidance files, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application .
- the one or more templates may include a shooting template generated by the sending device according to one or more shooting parameters of the associated multimedia file, that is, the "shooting guidance file" mentioned in the foregoing embodiment ".
- each multimedia file may be associated or bound with one or more templates in different ways.
- each multimedia file can be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” of the multimedia file through the file name.
- a unique hash value may be generated for each multimedia file to be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or "editing guidance file” of the multimedia file.
- the key value preset for each multimedia file is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file” and/or “editing guidance file” of the multimedia file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the "shooting parameters" involved in the embodiment of the present application may include the focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, One or more parameters in Level Meter Effect, Exposure, and Sensitivity.
- the one or more templates may also include an editing template generated by the sending device according to one or more editing parameters of the associated multimedia file, that is, the "editing guidance" mentioned in the foregoing embodiments document".
- the "editing parameters" involved in the embodiment of the present application may include operating parameters for the user to perform editing processing on the multimedia file, and the editing processing includes cropping, adjusting filter color, Adjust one or more of beauty parameters, adjust brightness levels, label processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing, and watermark processing.
- the one or more templates may also include a preset template.
- the preset template is not limited to a shooting guidance file or an editing guidance file.
- different electronic devices have different hardware, corresponding to different hardware parameters and hardware capabilities, and may be configured with shooting parameters suitable for hardware such as the camera of the electronic device at the factory, and the user can shoot without additional settings
- the preset shooting parameters may correspond to the preset shooting guidance file. If the user wishes to share the preset shooting guidance file with other electronic devices such as a tablet, he can also share any photo taken on the mobile phone and the preset shooting guidance file with the tablet through the process of the embodiment of the present application. , so that the tablet can also take photos with the same display effect, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- a preset editing guide file can also be configured for the mobile phone, which will not be repeated here.
- one or more files such as shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files related to the multimedia file to be shared can be displayed to the user for the user to manually select one or more files to realize on-demand sharing.
- one or more template name controls related to multimedia files may be displayed on the first sharing interface, for example, original files (cover thumbnails, etc.), intermediate files related to multimedia files are displayed in the form of a file list , final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the first sharing interface may also display options corresponding to one or more sharing methods such as Huawei Share, WeChat application sharing, Bluetooth, message, email, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the multimedia file can be edited multiple times by the user, and the first sharing interface can be shown in the interface 702 shown in (b) of FIG. Photo 1) related original file, intermediate file 1, intermediate file 2, intermediate file 3...final file, shooting instruction file, editing instruction file 1, editing instruction file 2, editing instruction file 3 and other files.
- On the first sharing interface detect a second operation for selecting a template to be shared, and determine the template to be shared in response to the second operation, where the template to be shared is the n templates one or more of the .
- the "second operation" here may include an operation in which the user clicks or selects one or more files.
- the second operation may include four click operations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- a third operation for selecting a sharing method is detected, and in response to the third operation, determine the selected sharing method from the one or more sharing methods, and display the second sharing method of the multimedia file interface, where the second sharing interface displays the identifications of one or more electronic devices.
- the target sharing method includes Huawei sharing method, WLAN direct channel sharing method, Bluetooth sharing method, mobile data sharing method or any one of multiple social software sharing methods.
- the "third operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks on the option or control where the sharing method is selected.
- the "fourth operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks to select the display area where the name or icon of the target electronic device is located.
- the process of sharing multimedia files includes multiple possible sharing interfaces, and the content displayed on each sharing interface is different.
- the first sharing interface may be the interface 602 shown in Figure 6 (b), or the interface 702 shown in Figure 7 (b), or the interface 702 shown in Figure 8 (b).
- the interface 802 shown; the second sharing interface can be the interface 603 shown in the (c) figure in Figure 6, or the interface 703 shown in the (c) figure in Figure 7, or the (c) figure in Figure 8
- the shown interface 803 is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the sending end device may respond to the The fourth operation is to send the template to be shared and the multimedia file to the receiver device through the sharing method.
- the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo can be selected by default, and the file corresponding to the photo
- the "original file" in the list is also selected by default, which can simplify the user's operation, and the user can also check the display effect of the photo on the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
- the sending device may display on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface a template with The multimedia file of the first display effect, the first display effect corresponds to the editing template.
- the sending end device detects a fifth operation for selecting the multimedia file with the first display effect, and responds to the fifth Operation, the multimedia file with the first display effect becomes selected; and, in response to the fourth operation, send the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method, with The multimedia file of the first display effect.
- the original image associated with the photo can be displayed in the form of a thumbnail.
- file, intermediate file, and the original file and intermediate file associated with the photo 1 may have different display effects, and different static preview effects of the three photos are displayed side by side for users to preview different display effects.
- n templates include the first editing template and the second editing template associated with the multimedia file
- the interface further includes the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect, and the multimedia file with the second display effect.
- the first display effect corresponds to the first editing template
- the second display effect corresponds to the second editing template.
- the multimedia file and all the multimedia files displayed in a dynamic playing manner and having the first display effect are further included.
- the multimedia file and the multimedia file with the second display effect are further included.
- the multimedia file and the multimedia file with the first display effect are displayed in a dynamic playing manner and the multimedia file with the second display effect.
- the sharing interface of the first multimedia file further includes a control
- the sending device can detect on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface Up to a sixth operation acting on the control, in response to the sixth operation, each of the n templates is displayed as being selected;
- the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia file is also displayed as being selected; or,
- the multimedia files with different display effects are all displayed as being displayed Checked state.
- the "one control” may be the "Linked Share” control 802-1 shown in (b) of Figure 8, and the "Linked Share” control 802-1 can be used to quickly select and All files associated with the photo to be shared.
- the display mode of the above-mentioned "linkage sharing" control provides users with a link sharing solution.
- the user can quickly select all files related to the first multimedia file to be shared through the link share control, such as original files, intermediate files, For the final file, shooting guide file and editing guide file, all associated files are used as files to be shared and shared with the receiving end device.
- This method can avoid the omission of sharing process files, and facilitate the shooting process of the first multimedia file. Both the process and the production process are shared with the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
- implementation process of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may depend on the ability of the sending device to record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
- the capability of acquiring related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters in this embodiment of the present application may be a system capability of the electronic device.
- the system capability may be invoked by various application programs with shooting capabilities such as camera applications. This method does not require additional operations by the user to enable the shooting guidance function, thereby simplifying the user's operations.
- the ability to obtain relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters can be based on the camera application configured on the sending end device when it leaves the factory, or can also be based on the user's downloaded and installed beauty camera, Meipai, etc.
- the "capability of obtaining relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters" in the embodiment of the present application may be configured in related applications such as a camera application and a gallery application.
- the embodiment of the present application can also support the user to turn off the preset function through the setting control of the camera application; or turn off the preset function through a certain menu or control of the gallery application ; Or, turn off the default function through the menu related to the system-level setting application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the second stage the use stage of the receiving end device (such as a tablet)
- the user allows to receive the first operation of the m templates, and in response to the first operation, receive and acquire the m templates, and display the m templates in the prompt window.
- a prompt window may be displayed on the display screen, the prompt window is used to prompt the user to choose whether to receive the m templates, and the user passes The first operation determines to receive the m templates.
- the receiving end device can parse and obtain the parameter information contained in the one or more templates, and the receiving end device can determine the function and associated of one or more applications.
- the interface of the application is directly invoked and displayed, and the application parses the target template to obtain one or more parameter.
- the one or more applications associated with the target template include one or more applications with a shooting function installed on the receiving end device.
- the shooting template is associated with a camera application
- the camera application is invoked and a first shooting preview interface is displayed
- the first shooting preview interface includes one or more shooting parameters based on the shooting template displayed screen.
- the user clicks the "OK” control as shown in (d) in Figure 10, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can directly start the camera application, and jump to display (f) in Figure 10
- the shooting preview interface 1006 of the shown camera application enables the user to shoot other pictures based on one or more shooting parameters included in the received shooting guidance file (photo 1-D).
- the target application is invoked and a second shooting preview interface is displayed, and the second shooting preview interface includes The screen displayed by one or more shooting parameters included in the template.
- the receiver device may detect a fourth operation for shooting on the first shooting preview interface or the second shooting preview interface, and in response to the fourth operation, based on the One or more shooting parameters, shooting to obtain a second multimedia file, so that the second multimedia file and the first multimedia file have the same shooting effect, and the second multimedia file is Any of photos, GIFs, or video clips.
- the tablet can display the interface 1005 shown in (e) in Figure 10, and the prompt window 1005-1 on the interface 1005 shows a number of pictures, such as Meipai, WeChat, and camera, etc. that have the shooting function on the tablet.
- the embodiment of this application does not limit the multiple applications that can be associated.
- the user can select the required application in the prompt window 1005-1, for example, click the icon of the camera application, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet jumps to display the shooting preview of the camera application as shown in (f) in Figure 10
- the interface 1006 enables the user to shoot other pictures based on one or more shooting parameters included in the received shooting guidance file (photo 1-D).
- the shooting scenes provided in the embodiments of the present application can also be used for recording video scenes, dual-view shooting, multi-view shooting, portraits, videos, night scenes, professional and other different shooting modes or shooting scenes. This is not limited. Among them, each shooting mode has its own particularity, but the shooting process, editing operation process and corresponding parameters can refer to the process of taking photos described above, and all shooting modes can generate corresponding shooting guidance files.
- the method for sharing multimedia files can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos;
- an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
- the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
- users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
- multimedia files such as photos and videos
- the sharing of the shooting process and editing process can be realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guide file
- the shooting parameters included in the guide file guide the shooting process and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
- the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared.
- the purpose of sharing is more precise.
- first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features.
- a feature defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features.
- first template and second template represent different templates, such as shooting guide template, editing guide template, etc.
- first multimedia file “second multiple “Media file” refers to multimedia files such as photos with different display effects.
- sequence numbers of the processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
- the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
- preset "fixed value”, etc. can be used by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other It can be implemented by indicating relevant information, and this application does not limit the specific implementation, such as "preset template” and so on.
- the electronic device eg, the sending-end device, the receiving-end device, etc.
- the electronic device includes corresponding hardware and/or software modules for performing each function.
- the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions in combination with the embodiments for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
- the functional modules of the electronic device can be divided according to the above method examples.
- each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be divided into integrated in one processing module.
- the above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
- a possible composition diagram of the electronic device (such as the sending end device, receiving end device, etc.) involved in the above embodiment, the electronic device (such as the sending end device, receiving end device, etc.) terminal equipment, etc.) may include: a display unit, a detection unit and a processing unit.
- the display unit, the detection unit and the processing unit cooperate with each other, and can be used to support the electronic device to execute the above steps, etc., and/or be used in other processes of the technologies described herein.
- the electronic device provided in this embodiment (for example, the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) is used to implement the above method for sharing multimedia files, so it can achieve the same effect as the above implementation method.
- the electronic device may include a processing module, a storage module, and a communication module.
- the processing module can be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device (such as the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.), for example, it can be used to support the electronic device (such as the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) to execute the above display unit , the steps performed by the detection unit and the processing unit.
- the storage module can be used to support electronic devices (such as sending end devices, receiving end devices, etc.) to execute and store program codes, data, and the like.
- the communication module can be used to support the communication between the sending end device and the receiving end device.
- the processing module may be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure.
- the processor can also be a combination of computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP) and a microprocessor, and the like.
- the storage module may be a memory.
- the communication module may be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, and a Wi-Fi chip.
- the processing module is a processor and the storage module is a memory
- the electronic device (such as a sending device, a receiving device, etc.) involved in this embodiment may be a device having the structure shown in FIG. 1 .
- This embodiment also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device (such as a sending-end device, a receiving-end device, etc.), the electronic device (for example, the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) execute the above related method steps to implement the method for sharing multimedia files in the above embodiment.
- an electronic device such as a sending-end device, a receiving-end device, etc.
- the electronic device for example, the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.
- This embodiment also provides a computer program product.
- the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the above related steps, so as to implement the method for sharing multimedia files in the above embodiment.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may specifically be a chip, a component or a module, and the device may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and when the device is running, The processor can execute the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the methods for shooting guidance and sharing multimedia files in the above method embodiments.
- the electronic equipment such as sending end equipment, receiving end equipment, etc.
- computer readable storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are all used to execute the corresponding method provided above, therefore, it can For the beneficial effects achieved, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the corresponding methods provided above, which will not be repeated here.
- the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components can be combined or It may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented.
- the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- a unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and a component shown as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, which may be located in one place or distributed to multiple different places. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
- an integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods in various embodiments of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2022年01月27日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202210105141.4、申请名称为“一种分享多媒体文件的方法、发送端设备和接收端设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on January 27, 2022, with the application number 202210105141.4 and the application name "A method for sharing multimedia files, sending end equipment and receiving end equipment". The entire contents are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种分享多媒体文件的方法、发送端设备和接收端设备。The present application relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to a method for sharing multimedia files, a sending end device and a receiving end device.
随着拍照、录制短视频、在线直播领域等多媒体场景的井喷式发展和普及,用户对拍摄图片、录制视频等涉及电子设备拍摄功能的使用场景越来越多。With the blowout development and popularization of multimedia scenarios such as taking pictures, recording short videos, and online live broadcasts, users are using more and more scenarios involving shooting functions of electronic devices, such as taking pictures and recording videos.
示例性的,用户可以使用手机、平板等电子设备拍摄喜欢的事物,或者记录每天的生活趣事。例如,用户可以拍摄充满趣味的照片、视频、具有图像互换格式(graphics interchange format,gif)的动态图片等多媒体文件,并将照片、视频等多媒体文件分享给其他用户。Exemplarily, the user can use electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets to take pictures of things he likes, or to record interesting things in daily life. For example, a user can take multimedia files such as interesting photos, videos, dynamic pictures in graphics interchange format (gif), and share the photos, videos and other multimedia files with other users.
用户在拍摄照片、视频的过程中,可能修改或重新设置了焦距、分辨率、色彩指标等一种或多种拍摄参数;或者,用户在拍摄完成之后,可能对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行了一系列的编辑处理,例如调整了美颜级别、亮度、滤镜等一种或多种参数,才得到了用户满意、充满趣味的多媒体文件。当用户向其他电子设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件时,最终分享的都是多媒体文件的结果,其他电子设备接收用户分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件之后,该照片、视频等多媒体文件可以作为独立文件被保存到本地,也仅仅是作为一种结果文件在接收端设备上呈现出来。During the process of taking photos and videos, the user may modify or reset one or more shooting parameters such as focal length, resolution, and color indicators; or, after the shooting is completed, the user may modify multimedia files such as photos and videos A series of editing processes, such as adjusting one or more parameters such as beautification level, brightness, filter, etc., can obtain user-satisfied and interesting multimedia files. When a user shares photos, videos and other multimedia files with other electronic devices, what is finally shared is the result of the multimedia files. After other electronic devices receive the photos, videos and other multimedia files shared by the user, the photos, videos and other multimedia files can be used as independent The file is saved locally, and it is only presented on the receiving end device as a result file.
当接收方用户也期望拍摄出类似与接收的照片、视频等多媒体文件的效果时,可能因为缺少相关的拍摄经验,无法拍摄出一样充满趣味的照片、视频;或者,接收方用户可能花费很多时间去调整拍摄参数,也不一定可以获得期望的显示效果。When the receiving user also expects to take photos and videos that are similar to the received multimedia files, they may not be able to take the same interesting photos and videos due to lack of relevant shooting experience; or, the receiving user may spend a lot of time To adjust the shooting parameters, it is not necessarily possible to obtain the desired display effect.
因此,在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,接收端设备如何根据发送端设备分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件,也拍摄出同样效果、充满趣味的多媒体文件,完成更多的拍摄,是当前亟需解决的难题。Therefore, in the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos, how the receiving device can also shoot multimedia files with the same effect and full of interest according to the multimedia files such as photos and videos shared by the sending device, so as to complete more shooting. current problems that need to be resolved.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种分享多媒体文件的方法及电子设备,该方法可以实现将发送端设备的拍摄过程和编辑经验分享到接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,提升了使用体验。The present application provides a method and electronic device for sharing multimedia files, which can share the shooting process and editing experience of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can guide the shooting process according to the shooting guidance file, and/or , make interesting multimedia files according to the editing guide file, which improves the user experience.
第一方面提供了一种分享多媒体文件的方法,应用于电子设备,该方法包括:一种分享多媒体文件的方法,其特征在于,应用于包括显示屏的发送端设备,所述方法 包括:检测到用于分享多媒体文件的第一操作,所述多媒体文件是照片、动图或视频片段中的任意一种;响应于所述第一操作,确定所述多媒体文件关联的n个模板,并显示所述多媒体文件的第一分享界面,所述第一分享界面上包括所述多媒体文件、所述n个模板、以及一种或多种分享方式,所述n个模板中的每一个模板包括使所述多媒体文件具有不同显示效果的一种或多种参数,n为大于或等于1的整数;在所述第一分享界面上,检测到用于选择待分享模板的第二操作,响应于所述第二操作,确定所述待分享模板,所述待分享模板是所述n个模板中的一个或多个;检测到用于选择分享方式的第三操作,响应于所述第三操作,从所述一种或多种分享方式中,确定选择的分享方式,且显示所述多媒体文件的第二分享界面,所述第二分享界面上显示一个或多个电子设备的标识;在所述第二分享界面上,检测到用于确定接收端设备的第四操作,响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板。The first aspect provides a method for sharing multimedia files, which is applied to electronic devices. The method includes: a method for sharing multimedia files, which is characterized in that it is applied to a sending end device including a display screen. The method includes: detecting To the first operation for sharing a multimedia file, the multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips; in response to the first operation, determine n templates associated with the multimedia file, and display The first sharing interface of the multimedia file, the first sharing interface includes the multimedia file, the n templates, and one or more sharing methods, each of the n templates includes The multimedia file has one or more parameters with different display effects, n is an integer greater than or equal to 1; on the first sharing interface, a second operation for selecting a template to be shared is detected, and in response to the The second operation is to determine the template to be shared, and the template to be shared is one or more of the n templates; the third operation for selecting a sharing method is detected, and in response to the third operation, From the one or more sharing methods, determine the selected sharing method, and display the second sharing interface of the multimedia file, and the identification of one or more electronic devices is displayed on the second sharing interface; in the said second sharing interface On the second sharing interface, a fourth operation for determining the receiving end device is detected, and in response to the fourth operation, the template to be shared is sent to the receiving end device through the sharing method.
通过上述过程,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法,能够在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,可以为用户显示该多媒体文件关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,支持用户手动选择期望分享的一种或多种文件。用户可以根据不同的分享需求,手动选择将照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,发送给接收端设备。Through the above process, the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can display the original file and intermediate file associated with the multimedia file for the user during the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device by the sending device , final file, shooting guide file and editing guide file, and support the user to manually select one or more files to be shared. According to different sharing requirements, users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device.
该方法在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的同时,实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。This method realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process while sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can The shooting process is guided according to the shooting parameters included in the shooting instruction file, and/or interesting multimedia files are produced according to the editing parameters included in the editing instruction file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
可选地,本申请实施例的“多媒体文件”可以是用户通过电子设备的相机应用等拍摄得到的照片、动图或视频片段等,也可以是用户从网络、服务器、社交平台等下载的照片、动图或视频片段等,或者接收的由其他设备发送并保存在电子设备的本地的照片、动图或视频片段等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "multimedia file" in the embodiment of the present application may be photos, animations or video clips taken by the user through the camera application of the electronic device, etc., or it may be a photo downloaded by the user from the network, server, social platform, etc. , moving pictures or video clips, etc., or received photos, moving pictures or video clips sent by other devices and stored locally on the electronic device, this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
示例性的,以用户下载的一张照片为例,当用户下载该照片并保存到电子设备的本地图库时,电子设备可以检测该照片并获取该照片对应的拍摄参数,例如该照片的亮度等级、滤镜色彩等拍摄参数,或者获取该照片被编辑处理的编辑参数,此处不再一一赘述。Exemplarily, taking a photo downloaded by the user as an example, when the user downloads the photo and saves it to the local gallery of the electronic device, the electronic device can detect the photo and obtain shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, such as the brightness level of the photo , filter color and other shooting parameters, or obtain the editing parameters of the photo being edited and processed, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,照片、动图或视频片段等任意一个多媒体文件,对应不同的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数时,可以呈现出不同的显示效果。It should be understood that any multimedia file such as a photo, a moving picture, or a video clip may present different display effects when corresponding to different shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
还应理解,在本申请实施例中,所述发送端设备存储有多个多媒体文件,以及每一个多媒体文件关联的一个或多个模板。It should also be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the sending end device stores multiple multimedia files and one or more templates associated with each multimedia file.
示例性的,某多媒体文件关联n个模板,n个模板可以包括该多媒体文件关联的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件。Exemplarily, a certain multimedia file is associated with n templates, and the n templates may include shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files associated with the multimedia file.
示例性的,多媒体文件可以是一张照片,那么该照片关联的一个或多个模板,可以包括:拍摄指导文件、一个或多个编辑指导文件等。Exemplarily, the multimedia file may be a photo, and one or more templates associated with the photo may include: a shooting guide file, one or more editing guide files, and the like.
或者,多媒体文件可以是一个视频片段,那么该视频片段关联的一个或多个模板,可以包括:一个或多个拍摄指导文件、一个或多个编辑指导文件等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the multimedia file may be a video segment, and one or more templates associated with the video segment may include: one or more shooting guidance files, one or more editing guidance files, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application .
一种可能的实现方式中,每一个多媒体文件可以通过不同的方式和一个或多个模板进行关联或绑定。In a possible implementation manner, each multimedia file may be associated or bound with one or more templates in different ways.
可选地,每一个多媒体文件可以通过文件名和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Optionally, each multimedia file can be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file through the file name.
或者,通过为每一个多媒体文件可以生成唯一的哈希值和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Alternatively, a unique hash value may be generated for each multimedia file to be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file.
又或者,通过为每一个多媒体文件预设的关键值和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the key value preset for each multimedia file is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,“第一操作”可以是用户在该多媒体文件的详情界面上,点击“分享”选项或控件的操作。Optionally, the "first operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks the option or control of "Share" on the details interface of the multimedia file.
可选地,这里“第二操作”可以包括用户点击或选中一个或多个文件的操作,例如用户依次选中了该多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件,那么该第二操作可以包括四次点击操作,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "second operation" here may include an operation in which the user clicks or selects one or more files. The second operation may include four click operations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,“第三操作”可以是用户点击选择分享方式所在选项或控件的操作。Optionally, the "third operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks on the option or control where the sharing method is selected.
可选地,“第四操作”可以是用户点击选择目标电子设备的名称或图标所在显示区域的操作。Optionally, the "fourth operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks to select the display area where the name or icon of the target electronic device is located.
可选地,所述目标分享方式包括华为分享方式、WLAN直连通道的分享方式、蓝牙分享方式、移动数据分享方式或多种社交软件分享方式中的任意一种。Optionally, the target sharing method includes Huawei sharing method, WLAN direct channel sharing method, Bluetooth sharing method, mobile data sharing method or any one of multiple social software sharing methods.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述n个模板中包括预设模板;和/或,所述n个模板中包括所述发送端设备根据关联的所述多媒体文件的一种或多种拍摄参数生成的拍摄模板,所述拍摄参数包括焦距、对焦模式、分辨率、摄像头、地理位置信息、美颜参数、滤镜色彩、闪光灯效果、水平仪效果、曝光度、感光度中的一种或多种。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the n templates include a preset template; and/or, the n templates include the multimedia file associated with the sending device according to A shooting template generated by one or more shooting parameters, the shooting parameters include focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure, sensitivity one or more of the degrees.
和/或,所述n个模板中包括所述发送端设备根据关联的所述多媒体文件的一种或多种编辑参数生成的编辑模板,所述编辑参数包括用户对所述多媒体文件执行编辑处理的操作参数,所述编辑处理包括裁剪、调整滤镜色彩、调整美颜参数、调整亮度等级、标注处理、涂鸦处理、马赛克处理、水印处理中的一种或多种。And/or, the n templates include editing templates generated by the sending end device according to one or more editing parameters associated with the multimedia file, where the editing parameters include editing processing performed by the user on the multimedia file The editing process includes one or more of cropping, adjusting filter color, adjusting beautification parameters, adjusting brightness level, marking processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing, and watermark processing.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上包括所述多媒体文件,且所述多媒体文件处于被选中状态时,所述响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板,包括:响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板和所述多媒体文件。In combination with the first aspect and the above-mentioned implementation manners, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, when the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, and the multimedia file is in When in the selected state, the sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method in response to the fourth operation includes: responding to the fourth operation, through the sharing method, Sending the template to be shared and the multimedia file to the receiving device.
示例性的,以多媒体文件是照片为例,用户触发分享该照片,那么在照片分享界面上,该照片的缩略图的右下角的选择框可以默认为被选中的状态,且该照片对应的文件列表中的“原始文件”也默认为被选中的状态,可以简化用户的操作,用户可以在接收端设备上也查看该照片的显示效果,提高了用户体验。Exemplarily, taking a multimedia file as a photo as an example, if the user triggers to share the photo, then on the photo sharing interface, the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo can be selected by default, and the file corresponding to the photo The "original file" in the list is also selected by default, which can simplify the user's operation, and the user can also check the display effect of the photo on the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当所述n个模板中包括所述多媒体文件关联的编辑模板时,在所述第一分享界面和/或所述第二分享界面上,还包括具有第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件,所述第一显示效果对应于所述编辑模板。With reference to the first aspect and the above-mentioned implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, when the n templates include an editing template associated with the multimedia file, on the first sharing interface and/or the The second sharing interface further includes the multimedia file with a first display effect, and the first display effect corresponds to the editing template.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,在所述第一分享界面上或所述第二分享界面上,检测到用于选择具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件的第五操作,响应于所述第五操作,具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件变为被选中状态;以及,所述响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板,包括:响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板、具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件。With reference to the first aspect and the above-mentioned implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, it is detected on the first sharing interface or on the second sharing interface that the A fifth operation of the multimedia file, in response to the fifth operation, the multimedia file with the first display effect becomes selected; and, in response to the fourth operation, through the The method of sharing, sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device includes: in response to the fourth operation, sending the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method, with the first Display the effect of the multimedia file.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当所述n个模板中包括所述多媒体文件关联的第一编辑模板和第二编辑模板时,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,还包括所述多媒体文件、具有第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件;或者,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,还包括所述多媒体文件、以动态播放方式显示的具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有所述第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件;或者,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,以动态播放方式显示所述多媒体文件、具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有所述第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件;其中,所述第一显示效果对应于所述第一编辑模板,所述第二显示效果对应于所述第二编辑模板。With reference to the first aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, when the n templates include the first editing template and the second editing template associated with the multimedia file, in the first On the sharing interface and/or on the second sharing interface, the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect and the multimedia file with the second display effect are further included; or, in the first The sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface further include the multimedia file, the multimedia file having the first display effect displayed in a dynamic playback mode, and the multimedia file having the second display effect. a multimedia file; or, on the first sharing interface and/or on the second sharing interface, dynamically display the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect, and the multimedia file with the The multimedia file of the second display effect; wherein, the first display effect corresponds to the first editing template, and the second display effect corresponds to the second editing template.
应理解,如果对该照片还执行了更多次数的编辑操作,用户还可以左右滑动以查看更多预览图片以及显示效果。It should be understood that if more editing operations are performed on the photo, the user can also swipe left and right to view more preview pictures and display effects.
还应理解,一张照片经过多次编辑处理后,在照片分享界面上显示了多种显示效果,任意一种不同显示效果的照片都可以被用户选中且发送到接收端设备。It should also be understood that after a photo has been edited multiple times, multiple display effects are displayed on the photo sharing interface, and any photo with different display effects can be selected by the user and sent to the receiving device.
上述显示方式,以静态展示和/或动态播放的预览方式,以供用户呈现生动的显示效果,便于用户对比不同的显示效果,从而选择期望分享的照片,提高了用户体验。The above display method uses static display and/or dynamic preview to present a vivid display effect for the user, which is convenient for the user to compare different display effects, thereby selecting the desired photo to share, and improving the user experience.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面还包括一个控件,所述方法还包括:在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面,检测到作用于所述控件的第六操作,响应于所述第六操作,所述n个模板中每一个模板都显示为被选中状态;以及,当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面包括所述多媒体文件时,响应于所述第六操作,所述多媒体文件也显示为被选中状态;或者,当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面包括具有不同显示效果的所述多媒体文件时,响应于所述第六操作,具有不同显示效果的所述多媒体文件都显示为被选中状态。In combination with the first aspect and the above-mentioned implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface further include a control, and the method further includes: On the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, a sixth operation acting on the control is detected, and in response to the sixth operation, each of the n templates is displayed as being selected and, when the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia file is also displayed as being selected; or, when the When the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface include the multimedia files with different display effects, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia files with different display effects are all displayed as being selected .
通过上述显示方式,为用户提供了联动分享的方案,用户可以通过联动分享控件,快捷选中与照片1相关的所有文件,例如原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等,将所有的关联文件都作为待分享文件,分享给接收端设备,该方法可以避免分享过程文件的遗漏,便于将照片1的拍摄过程和制作过程都分享给接收端设备,提高了用户体验。Through the above display method, a joint sharing solution is provided for users. Users can quickly select all files related to
应理解,当用户期望取消或修改某一个文件时,还可以点击某一个文件所在控件进行取消,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that when the user desires to cancel or modify a certain file, he can also click on the control where a certain file is located to cancel it, which will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面和上述实现方式,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:接收用户的第七操作,响应于所述第七操作,开启所述发送端设备的拍摄指导功能,所述拍摄指导功能使得所述发送端设备能够在拍摄所述多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄模板,和/或,在编辑所述多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑模板。With reference to the first aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving a seventh operation of the user, and in response to the seventh operation, enabling the shooting guidance of the sending end device function, the shooting guidance function enables the sending end device to generate a shooting template according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of shooting the multimedia file, and/or, during the process of editing the multimedia file, An edit template is generated based on one or more edit parameters.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法,能够在拍摄照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄指导文件;以及,在对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行编辑处理的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑指导文件。在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,可以为用户显示该多媒体文件关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,支持用户手动选择期望分享的一种或多种文件。To sum up, the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos; In the process of editing multimedia files such as multimedia files, an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters. In the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
根据不同的分享需求,用户可以手动选择将照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,发送给接收端设备,在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的同时,实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。According to different sharing requirements, users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device. At the same time as multimedia files such as photos and videos, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process can be realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guide file The shooting parameters included in the guide file guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
此外,在用户手动选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件过程中,在分享界面上,电子设备可以基于照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件,叠加拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等多种可能的文件,为用户生成静态或动态的在线预览画面,有助于用户查看不同文件对应的显示效果,便于用户选择待分享的文件,分享的目的更加精确。In addition, when the user manually selects the original files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, the corresponding shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files, on the sharing interface, the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared. The purpose of sharing is more precise.
第二方面提供了一种分享多媒体文件的方法,其特征在于,应用于包括显示屏的接收端设备,所述方法包括:当检测到发送端设备发送的m个模板时,在所述显示屏上显示提示窗口,所述提示窗口用于提示用户选择是否接收所述m个模板,所述m个模板中的每一个模板关联第一多媒体文件,且所述m个模板中的每一个模板包括使所述第一多媒体文件具有不同显示效果的一种或多种参数,所述第一多媒体文件是照片、动图或视频片段中的任意一种,m为大于或等于1的整数;在所述提示窗口中,检测到用户允许接收所述m个模板的第一操作,响应于所述第一操作,接收并获取所述m个模板,并在所述提示窗口中显示所述m个模板;在所述提示窗口中检测到选择目标模板的第二操作,响应于所述第二操作,确定所述目标模板;根据所述目标模板的类型和预设关系,确定所述目标模板关联的一个或多个应用;或者,当所述目标模板关联一个应用时,直接调用并显示所述应用的界面,由所述应用解析所述目标模板,获取所述目标模板中包括的一种或多种参数;当所述目标模板关联多个应用时,在所述提示窗口中显示所述多个应用的图标,检测到选择目标应用的图标的第三操作,响应于所述第三操作,调用并显示所述目标应用的界面,由所述目标应用解析所述目标模 板,获取所述目标模板中包括的一种或多种参数。The second aspect provides a method for sharing multimedia files, which is characterized in that it is applied to a receiving device that includes a display screen, and the method includes: when m templates sent by the sending device are detected, displaying on the display screen A prompt window is displayed on the top, and the prompt window is used to prompt the user to select whether to receive the m templates, each of the m templates is associated with the first multimedia file, and each of the m templates The template includes one or more parameters that make the first multimedia file have different display effects, the first multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips, and m is greater than or equal to An integer of 1; in the prompt window, it is detected that the user allows the first operation of receiving the m templates, in response to the first operation, receiving and acquiring the m templates, and in the prompt window displaying the m templates; detecting a second operation of selecting a target template in the prompt window, and determining the target template in response to the second operation; determining the target template according to the type and preset relationship of the target template One or more applications associated with the target template; or, when the target template is associated with an application, the interface of the application is directly invoked and displayed, and the application parses the target template to obtain the Include one or more parameters; when the target template is associated with multiple applications, display the icons of the multiple applications in the prompt window, detect the third operation of selecting the icon of the target application, and respond to the The third operation is to invoke and display the interface of the target application, and the target application parses the target template to obtain one or more parameters included in the target template.
通过上述方法,当接收端设备接收到发送端设备发送的“m个模板”并解析该“m个模板”。例如当m个模板包括照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄指导文件时,可以根据该拍摄指导文件中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数指导当前的拍摄过程,和/或,当m个模板包括照片、视频等多媒体文件的编辑指导文件时,可以根据编辑指导文件中包括的一种或多种编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。Through the above method, when the receiving end device receives the "m templates" sent by the sending end device and parses the "m templates". For example, when m templates include shooting guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos, the current shooting process can be guided according to one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting guidance file, and/or, when m templates include photos , video and other multimedia files, you can make interesting multimedia files according to one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
以上过程实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将发送端设备的照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,提高了使用体验。The above process realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can follow the shooting guide file. The shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which improves the user experience.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述m个模板中包括预设模板;和/或,所述m个模板中包括拍摄模板,所述拍摄模板包括关联的所述第一多媒体文件的一种或多种拍摄参数,所述拍摄参数包括焦距、对焦模式、分辨率、摄像头、地理位置信息、美颜参数、滤镜色彩、闪光灯效果、水平仪效果、曝光度、感光度中的一种或多种;和/或,所述m个模板中包括编辑模板,所述编辑模板包括关联的所述第一多媒体文件的一种或多种编辑参数,所述编辑参数包括用户对所述第一多媒体文件执行编辑处理的操作参数,所述编辑处理包括裁剪、调整滤镜色彩、调整美颜参数、调整亮度等级、标注处理、涂鸦处理、马赛克处理、水印处理中的一种或多种。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the m templates include a preset template; and/or, the m templates include a shooting template, and the shooting template includes the associated One or more shooting parameters of the first multimedia file, the shooting parameters include focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure , one or more of sensitivity; and/or, the m templates include an editing template, and the editing template includes one or more editing parameters of the associated first multimedia file, so The editing parameters include operating parameters for the user to perform editing processing on the first multimedia file, and the editing processing includes cropping, adjusting filter color, adjusting beauty parameters, adjusting brightness levels, labeling processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing , one or more of watermark processing.
结合第二方面和上述实现方式,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述目标模板是拍摄模板时,所述目标模板关联的一个或多个应用包括所述接收端设备上安装的具有拍摄功能的一个或多个应用。With reference to the second aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, when the target template is a shooting template, the one or more applications associated with the target template include the One or more apps with camera functionality.
结合第二方面和上述实现方式,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述拍摄模板关联相机应用时,调用所述相机应用并显示第一拍摄预览界面,所述第一拍摄预览界面包括基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数显示的画面;当所述拍摄模板关联多个具有拍摄功能的应用时,响应于所述第三操作,调用所述目标应用并显示第二拍摄预览界面,所述第二拍摄预览界面包括基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数显示的画面。With reference to the second aspect and the above-mentioned implementations, in some implementations of the second aspect, when the shooting template is associated with a camera application, the camera application is invoked and a first shooting preview interface is displayed, and the first shooting preview interface including a screen displayed based on one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting template; when the shooting template is associated with multiple applications with a shooting function, in response to the third operation, calling the target application and displaying A second shooting preview interface, where the second shooting preview interface includes images displayed based on one or more shooting parameters included in the shooting template.
以及,所述方法还包括:在所述第一拍摄预览界面或所述第二拍摄预览界面检测到用于拍摄的第四操作,响应于所述第四操作,基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数,拍摄得到第二多媒体文件,使得所述第二多媒体文件和所述第一多媒体文件具有相同的拍摄效果,所述第二多媒体文件是照片、动图或视频片段中的任意一种。And, the method further includes: detecting a fourth operation for shooting on the first shooting preview interface or the second shooting preview interface, in response to the fourth operation, based on the One or more shooting parameters, shooting to obtain a second multimedia file, so that the second multimedia file and the first multimedia file have the same shooting effect, and the second multimedia file is Any of photos, GIFs, or video clips.
结合第二方面和上述实现方式,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述目标模板是编辑模板时,所述目标模板关联的一个或多个应用包括所述接收端设备上安装的具有多媒体文件编辑功能的一个或多个应用。With reference to the second aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, when the target template is an editing template, the one or more applications associated with the target template include the One or more applications with multimedia file editing functions.
结合第二方面和上述实现方式,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当所述编辑模板关联图库应用时,调用所述图库应用并显示第一列表界面,所述第一列表界面包括一个或多个多媒体文件;或者,当所述编辑模板关联多个具有多媒体文件编辑功能的应 用时,响应于所述第三操作,调用所述目标应用并显示第二列表界面,所述第二列表界面包括一个或多个多媒体文件;以及,所述方法还包括:在所述第一列表界面或所述第二列表界面检测到选择第三多媒体文件的第五操作,响应于所述第五操作,根据所述编辑模板中包括的一种或多种编辑参数,自动对所述第三多媒体文件进行编辑处理,显示并保存编辑处理后的所述第三多媒体文件。In combination with the second aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, when the editing template is associated with a gallery application, the gallery application is invoked and a first list interface is displayed, and the first list interface includes a or multiple multimedia files; or, when the editing template is associated with multiple applications with multimedia file editing functions, in response to the third operation, calling the target application and displaying a second list interface, the second list The interface includes one or more multimedia files; and, the method further includes: detecting a fifth operation of selecting a third multimedia file on the first list interface or the second list interface, in response to the first list interface or the second list interface The fifth operation is to automatically edit the third multimedia file according to one or more editing parameters included in the editing template, and display and save the edited third multimedia file.
结合第二方面和上述实现方式,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:检测到所述发送端设备发送的所述第一多媒体文件和/或具有不同显示效果的所述第一多媒体文件;响应于所述第一操作,接收并在所述提示窗口中显示所述第一多媒体文件和/或具有不同显示效果的所述第一多媒体文件。With reference to the second aspect and the above implementation manners, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: detecting that the first multimedia file sent by the sending end device has a different display effect the first multimedia file; in response to the first operation, receiving and displaying the first multimedia file and/or the first multimedia with different display effects in the prompt window document.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法,能够在拍摄照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄指导文件;以及,在对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行编辑处理的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑指导文件。在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,可以为用户显示该多媒体文件关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,支持用户手动选择期望分享的一种或多种文件。To sum up, the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos; In the process of editing multimedia files such as multimedia files, an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters. In the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
根据不同的分享需求,用户手动选择将照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,发送给接收端设备,在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的同时,实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。According to different sharing requirements, the user manually chooses to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device. , video and other multimedia files at the same time, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process is realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guidance file The included shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
此外,在用户手动选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件过程中,在分享界面上,电子设备可以基于照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件,叠加拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等多种可能的文件,为用户生成静态或动态的在线预览画面,有助于用户查看不同文件对应的显示效果,便于用户选择待分享的文件,分享的目的更加精确。In addition, when the user manually selects the original files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, the corresponding shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files, on the sharing interface, the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared. The purpose of sharing is more precise.
最后,对于多景拍摄的场景,本申请实施例能够实现多景拍摄的视频等在线预览和保存,一次拍摄,能够针对多景中的每一个画面生成多个视频片段以及每一个视频片段关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等一个或多个,丰富了拍摄体验,也给用户提供了极大的便利。Finally, for the scene of multi-scene shooting, the embodiment of the present application can realize the online preview and storage of the video of multi-scene shooting, and can generate multiple video clips and each video clip associated with each scene in one shot. One or more of the original file, the intermediate file, the final file, the shooting guidance file, and the editing guidance file enrich the shooting experience and provide users with great convenience.
第三方面提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以是发送端设备,该电子设备包括:触摸屏;一个或多个处理器;一个或多个存储器;安装有多个应用程序的模块;所述存储器存储有一个或多个程序,所述一个或多个程序包括指令,当所述指令被所述电子设备执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如第一方面和第一方面中任一项所述能够由发送端设备执行的方法。The third aspect provides an electronic device, which may be a sending end device, and the electronic device includes: a touch screen; one or more processors; one or more memories; a module installed with multiple application programs; The memory stores one or more programs, and the one or more programs include instructions. When the instructions are executed by the electronic device, the electronic device executes the electronic device according to any one of the first aspect and the first aspect. The method that can be executed by the sending end device is described above.
第四方面提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以是接收端设备,该电子设备包括:触摸屏;一个或多个处理器;一个或多个存储器;安装有多个应用程序的模块;所述存储器存储有一个或多个程序,所述一个或多个程序包括指令,当所述指令被所述电 子设备执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如第二方面和第二方面中任一项所述能够由接收端设备执行的方法。The fourth aspect provides an electronic device, which may be a receiving end device, and the electronic device includes: a touch screen; one or more processors; one or more memories; a module installed with multiple application programs; One or more programs are stored in the memory, and the one or more programs include instructions. When the instructions are executed by the electronic device, the electronic device executes the electronic device according to any one of the second aspect and the second aspect. A method that can be performed by a receiving end device is described.
第五方面提供了一种系统,所述系统包括能够相互通信的发送端设备和接收端设备,所述发送端设备能够执行如第一方面和第一方面的实现方式中任一项所述的方法,所述接收端设备能够执行如第二方面和第二方面的实现方式中任一项所述的方法。A fifth aspect provides a system, the system includes a sending end device and a receiving end device capable of communicating with each other, and the sending end device is capable of executing the method described in any one of the first aspect and the implementation manner of the first aspect. method, the receiver device can execute the method according to any one of the second aspect and the implementation manners of the second aspect.
第六方面提供了一种电子设备上的图形用户界面系统,所述电子设备具有触摸屏、一个或多个存储器、以及一个或多个处理器,所述一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在所述一个或多个存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序,所述图形用户界面系统包括所述电子设备执行如第一方面和第一方面中任一项所述发送端设备执行的方法时,所述发送端设备显示的图形用户界面。The sixth aspect provides a graphical user interface system on an electronic device, the electronic device has a touch screen, one or more memories, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used to execute the One or more computer programs in the one or more memories, the graphical user interface system includes that when the electronic device executes the method performed by the sending end device as described in any one of the first aspect and the first aspect, the The graphical user interface displayed by the sender device.
第七方面提供了一种电子设备上的图形用户界面系统,所述电子设备具有触摸屏、一个或多个存储器、以及一个或多个处理器,所述一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在所述一个或多个存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序,所述图形用户界面系统包括所述电子设备执行如第二方面和第二方面中任一项所述接收端设备执行的方法时,所述接收端设备显示的图形用户界面。The seventh aspect provides a graphical user interface system on an electronic device, the electronic device has a touch screen, one or more memories, and one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used to execute the One or more computer programs in the one or more memories, the graphical user interface system includes when the electronic device executes the method performed by the receiving end device according to any one of the second aspect and the second aspect, the Graphical user interface displayed by the receiver device.
第八方面提供了一种装置,该装置包含在电子设备中,该电子设备可以是发送端设备或接收端设备。当该电子设备是发送端设备,该装置具有实现上述第一方面及上述第一方面的任意一种可能实现方式中所述发送端设备行为的功能。或者,当该电子设备是接收端设备,该装置具有实现上述第二方面及上述第二方面的任意一种可能实现方式中所述接收端设备行为的功能。An eighth aspect provides an apparatus, which is included in an electronic device, and the electronic device may be a sending end device or a receiving end device. When the electronic device is a sender device, the apparatus has a function of implementing the behavior of the sender device in the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. Alternatively, when the electronic device is a receiving end device, the apparatus has a function of implementing the behavior of the receiving end device in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect above.
可选地,该装置具有的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如,显示模块或单元、检测模块或单元、处理模块或单元等。Optionally, the functions of the device may be realized by hardware, or may be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware. Hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions described above. For example, a display module or unit, a detection module or unit, a processing module or unit, etc.
第九方面提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面或者第一方面的任意一种可能的分享多媒体文件的方法,或者使得所述电子设备执行如第二方面和第二方面的任意一种可能的分享多媒体文件的方法。A ninth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect. Any possible method for sharing multimedia files, or causing the electronic device to execute any possible method for sharing multimedia files as in the second aspect and the second aspect.
第十方面提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面或者第一方面的任意一种可能的分享多媒体文件的方法,或者使得所述电子设备执行如第二方面和第二方面的任意一种可能的分享多媒体文件的方法。The tenth aspect provides a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the first aspect or any one of the possible methods for sharing multimedia files in the first aspect, or to make the The electronic device executes any one of the possible methods for sharing multimedia files as in the second aspect and the second aspect.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一例电子设备的结构示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例的一例电子设备的软件结构框图。FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一例设置拍摄指导功能的过程的图形用户界面示意图。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of a process of setting a shooting guidance function provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一例拍摄照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo taking process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的一例编辑照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of photo editing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of the photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9是本申请实施例提供的再一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图10是本申请实施例提供的一例接收端设备接收文件的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a receiving device receiving a file provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图11是本申请实施例提供的一例分享多媒体文件的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sharing multimedia files provided by an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法可以应用于两个不同的电子设备之间,为了清楚的区分,在后续实施例的描述中,将“两个不同的电子设备”分别称为“发送端设备”和“接收端设备”。It should be understood that the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied between two different electronic devices. For "sender device" and "receiver device".
具体地,“发送端设备”和“接收端设备”可以是手机、平板电脑、可穿戴设备、车载设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等电子设备。Specifically, the "sending device" and "receiving device" can be mobile phones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) devices, laptops, Ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), netbook, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA) and other electronic equipment.
可选地,“发送端设备”和“接收端设备”可以是相同类型的设备,例如“发送端设备”和“接收端设备”都是手机;或者,“发送端设备”和“接收端设备”可以是不同类型的设备,例如,“发送端设备”是手机,“接收端设备”可以是平板等。Optionally, the "sending device" and the "receiving device" may be the same type of device, for example, both the "sending device" and the "receiving device" are mobile phones; or, the "sending device" and the "receiving device" " can be different types of devices, for example, the "sending device" is a mobile phone, and the "receiving device" can be a tablet, etc.
图1本申请实施例提供的一例电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an example of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,“接收端设备”和“发送端设备”可以具有相同的结构,例如都具有图1所示的电子设备100的结构;或者,“接收端设备”可以包括图1所示的电子设备100的更多或更少的结构,“发送端设备”可以包括图1所示的电子设备100的更多或更少的结构,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the "receiving device" and the "sending device" may have the same structure, for example, both have the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1; or, the "receiving device" may include the electronic device shown in FIG. More or less structures of the device 100, the "sending device" may include more or less structures of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 1 , which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may include a
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件, 也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。Wherein, the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100既可以作为发送端设备,也可以作为接收端设备。电子设备100的处理器110存储有实现该分享多媒体文件的方法所对应的计算机程序或指令。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 may serve as both a sending end device and a receiving end device. The
对于发送端设备,发送端设备能够记录拍摄过程和/或编辑过程,即获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力。For the sending end device, the sending end device can record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
示例性的,用户在发送端设备拍摄照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,发送端设备能够根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄指导文件,和/或,在用户对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行编辑处理的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑指导文件。Exemplarily, when the user is taking photos, videos and other multimedia files on the sending device, the sending device can generate a shooting guidance file according to one or more shooting parameters, and/or, when the user takes photos, videos and other multimedia files During the editing process, an editing guidance file is generated according to one or more editing parameters.
在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件时,可以根据用户的分享需求,支持用户手动选择的照片、视频等多媒体文件关联的原始文件、不同显示效果的中间文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等一种或多种,并发送给接收端设备。When the sending device shares multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, it can support the original files associated with photos, videos and other multimedia files manually selected by the user, intermediate files with different display effects, and shooting guidance files according to the user's sharing needs. and editing guide files, etc., and send them to the receiving end device.
对于接收端设备,当接收端设备接收到发送端设备发送的“一个或多个模板”且用户确认接收该“一个或多个模板”时,处理器110可以检测并解析该“一个或多个模板”。例如当一个或多个模板包括照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄指导文件时,可以根据该拍摄指导文件中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数指导当前的拍摄过程,和/或,当一个或多个模板包括照片、视频等多媒体文件的编辑指导文件时,可以根据编辑指导文件中包括的一种或多种编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。For the receiving end device, when the receiving end device receives "one or more templates" sent by the sending end device and the user confirms receiving the "one or more templates", the
以上过程实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将发送端设备的照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,提高了使用体验。The above process realizes the sharing of the shooting process and editing process, and can also send the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos of the sending device to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can follow the shooting guide file. The shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which improves the user experience.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments,
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充 电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments,
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal. The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G/6G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA) 等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Wherein, the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor.
应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A,
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,发送端设备和接收端设备作为两个不同的电子设备,都可以包括无线通信模块160。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the sending end device and the receiving end device are two different electronic devices, both of which may include the wireless communication module 160 .
可选地,发送端设备和接收端设备可以是连接在同一个Wi-Fi网络下的设备,两个设备之间可以基于Wi-Fi链路进行通信;或者,两个设备之间可以建立蓝牙连接,两个设备之间可以基于蓝牙通道进行通信;又或者,两个设备之间可以基于碰一碰等NFC技术建立连接;再或者,两个设备之间可以基于红外技术(infrared,IR)、2G/3G/4G/5G/6G等无线通信的方式建立连接,相应地,两个设备之间就可以以对应的方式进行通信,本申请实施例对发送端设备和接收端设备之间的通信方式不作限定。Optionally, the sending device and the receiving device can be devices connected to the same Wi-Fi network, and the two devices can communicate based on a Wi-Fi link; or, a Bluetooth connection can be established between the two devices Connection, two devices can communicate based on Bluetooth channel; or, two devices can establish a connection based on NFC technology such as touch; or, two devices can be based on infrared technology (infrared, IR) , 2G/3G/4G/5G/6G and other wireless communication methods to establish a connection. Correspondingly, the two devices can communicate in a corresponding manner. The communication method is not limited.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,当用户在发送端设备上点击“分享”控件触发进入分享流程显示分享界面时,以上列举的任意一种设备之间可能的连接方式,都可以使得发送端设备主动搜索附近的一个或多个近场设备,用户可以从一个或多个近场设备选择希望分享一个或多个模板的目的设备,即接收端设备。It should be understood that in this embodiment of the application, when the user clicks the "Share" control on the sending device to trigger the sharing process and display the sharing interface, any of the possible connection methods between the devices listed above can make the sending end The device actively searches for one or more nearby near-field devices, and the user can select the target device that wants to share one or more templates from one or more near-field devices, that is, the receiving end device.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。In some embodiments, the
应理解,在本申请实施例中,如果要实现在两个电子设备之间分享照片,可以包括以以上列举的任意一种通信方式进行传输,例如通过蓝牙、无线保真(wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi)模块等多种可能的方式,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, if it is necessary to share photos between two electronic devices, it may include transmitting in any of the communication methods listed above, such as Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (Wi- Fi) modules and other possible ways, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
还应理解,一种可能的方式中,电子设备可以安装有具有超宽带(ultra wide-band,UWB)无线感知能力的芯片等,那么多个电子设备之间就可以感知到附近存在的其他电子设备并识别出该电子设备的类型等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should also be understood that in a possible way, the electronic device can be equipped with a chip with ultra wide-band (ultra wide-band, UWB) wireless sensing capabilities, etc., so that multiple electronic devices can perceive other electronic devices that exist nearby. device and identify the type of the electronic device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等模块之间相互协作,进而在电子设备100的显示屏上显示图像、应用界面、控件、图标、窗口等,实现电子设备100的显示功能。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 cooperates with modules such as the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor, and then displays images, application interfaces, controls, icons, window, etc., to realize the display function of the electronic device 100 .
应理解,不论是发送端设备还是接收端设备,都可以包括显示屏194,该显示屏194可以显示不同的界面内容,并可以接收用户的触摸操作。It should be understood that both the sending end device and the receiving end device may include a display screen 194, and the display screen 194 may display different interface contents and may receive user's touch operation.
示例性的,发送端设备的显示屏194显示照片详情界面时,如果检测到用户点击“分享”选项等操作,可以将该触摸操作传递给处理器110,并根据处理器110的指示进入分享该照片的流程,同时该发送端设备的显示屏194上可以显示照片的分享界面,例如用户可以选择待分享的文件、分享方式、接收端设备的界面等。Exemplarily, when the display screen 194 of the sender device displays the photo details interface, if it is detected that the user clicks on the "share" option and other operations, the touch operation can be passed to the
示例性的,当接收端设备接收到发送端设备发送的一个或多个模板之后,可以在显示屏194上显示提示窗口,并检测用户在该提示窗口中执行的操作。当用户选择接收发送端设备发送的拍摄指导文件时,接收端设备可以根据该拍摄指导文件调用并运行相机应用,并在显示屏194上显示可能的相机预览界面,并自动根据拍摄指导文件中的一种或多种拍摄参数显示当前画面,此处不再赘述。Exemplarily, after receiving one or more templates sent by the sending device, the receiving device may display a prompt window on the display screen 194 and detect operations performed by the user in the prompt window. When the user chooses to receive the shooting guidance file sent by the sending end device, the receiving end device can call and run the camera application according to the shooting guidance file, and display a possible camera preview interface on the display screen 194, and automatically follow the shooting guidance file. One or more shooting parameters display the current picture, which will not be repeated here.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,电子设备100可以通过运行相机应用启动摄像头的拍摄功能,并在相机应用界面上显示拍摄的预览画面,用户可以点击拍摄快门键获取照片,并将照片保存在本地相册中,此处不再赘述。Exemplarily, in this embodiment of the application, the electronic device 100 can start the shooting function of the camera by running the camera application, and display the preview screen of the shooting on the camera application interface, and the user can click the shooting shutter button to obtain the photo and save the photo In the local photo album, I won't repeat them here.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 . For example, when taking a picture, open the shutter, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,摄像头193可以包括前置摄像头和后置摄像头,或者包括广角摄像头、微距摄像头、景深摄像头、人像摄像头等一种或多种类型的摄像头,本申请实施例对电子设备100拍摄过程中使用的摄像头193的数量和种类不作限定。Exemplarily, in this embodiment of the application, the camera 193 may include a front camera and a rear camera, or one or more types of cameras such as a wide-angle camera, a macro camera, a depth-of-field camera, and a portrait camera. For example, the number and types of cameras 193 used in the shooting process of the electronic device 100 are not limited.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By referring to the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。The
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。The
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. The electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also known as "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
可选地,在本申请实施例中,该触摸传感器180K可以检测用户的触摸、点击等操作,生成操作事件,并将该操作事件传递给处理器110,由处理器110确定该操作事件包括触摸点的坐标、触摸状态等相关参数,根据该操作事件做出响应。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the touch sensor 180K can detect user operations such as touch and click, generate an operation event, and transmit the operation event to the
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。The
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like. The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。The
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
示例性的,本申请实施例将以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设 备100的软件结构。Exemplarily, the embodiment of the present application will take the Android system with layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100.
图2是本申请实施例的一例电子设备100的软件结构框图。FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
可选地,如图2中的(a)图所示, 系统的分层架构可以包括若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工,且层与层之间通过软件接口通信。 Optionally, as shown in Figure 2 (a), The layered architecture of the system can include several layers, each layer has a clear role and division of labor, and the layers communicate through software interfaces.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层、网络传输层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system from top to bottom is respectively an application program layer, an application program framework layer, an Android runtime (Android runtime) and a system library, and a kernel layer and a network transport layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
示例性的,如图2中的(a)图所示,应用程序包可以包括相机、音乐、相册、设置等应用程序。在本申请实施例中,用户可以通过相机应用拍摄照片、动图、视频片段等多媒体文件,拍摄的照片、动图、视频片段等多媒体文件可以保存到相册应用(或图库应用)中。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 2 , the application program package may include application programs such as camera, music, photo album, and settings. In this embodiment of the application, the user can take photos, animations, video clips and other multimedia files through the camera application, and the photos, animations, video clips and other multimedia files taken can be saved in the photo album application (or gallery application).
可选地,本申请实施例的“相机应用”可以是电子设备出厂配置的相机应用,可以包括拍照、录像、双景录像等不同的拍摄模式,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "camera application" in the embodiment of the present application may be a camera application configured in the factory of the electronic device, which may include different shooting modes such as taking pictures, video recording, and dual-view recording, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,本申请实施例所提供的方法的实现过程可以依赖于发送端设备能够记录拍摄过程和/或编辑过程,即获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力。It should be understood that the implementation process of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may depend on the ability of the sending device to record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
可选地,本申请实施例的获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力可以是电子设备的系统能力,相机应用、相册应用等都可以调用该能力。例如,当用户拍摄照片时,相机应用可以记录拍摄过程的一种或多种拍摄参数;当用户编辑处理照片时,相册应用可以记录编辑过程的一种或多种编辑参数。Optionally, the capability of acquiring relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters in this embodiment of the present application may be a system capability of the electronic device, and the capability can be invoked by a camera application, an album application, and the like. For example, when a user takes a photo, the camera application may record one or more shooting parameters of the shooting process; when the user edits and processes the photo, the album application may record one or more editing parameters of the editing process.
或者,为相机应用配置获取相关的拍摄参数的能力,为相册应用配置记录编辑过程的一种或多种编辑参数的能力,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the camera application is configured with the ability to obtain relevant shooting parameters, and the photo album application is configured with the ability to record one or more editing parameters in the editing process, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。如图2所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,资源管理器,通知管理器等,以及本申请实施例所涉及的相机服务(camera service)模块。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions. As shown in Figure 2, the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a resource manager, a notification manager, etc., as well as a camera service (camera service) module involved in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。Among them, the window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括手机界面上相机应用的图标的显示,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, the display including the icon of the camera application on the mobile phone interface may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕 上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
本申请实施例的相机服务(camera service)模块可以具体包括参数获取模块、参数存储模块和文件生成模块等子模块,以实现本申请实施例的拍摄指导的功能。The camera service module of the embodiment of the present application may specifically include submodules such as a parameter acquisition module, a parameter storage module, and a file generation module, so as to realize the shooting guidance function of the embodiment of the present application.
具体地,参数获取模块可以用于获取照片、动图、视频片段等任意一个多媒体文件对应的一种或多种拍摄参数。Specifically, the parameter acquisition module can be used to acquire one or more shooting parameters corresponding to any multimedia file such as photos, animations, and video clips.
示例性的,以照片为例,在用户拍摄照片时,参数获取模块可以获取焦距、对焦模式、分辨率、摄像头、地理位置信息、美颜参数、滤镜色彩、闪光灯效果、水平仪效果、曝光度、感光度中的一种或多种参数。和/或,获取用户执行的编辑处理相关的修剪比例、调整滤镜色彩、调整美颜参数、调整亮度等级中的一种或多种编辑参数,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, taking a photo as an example, when the user takes a photo, the parameter acquisition module can obtain focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, level effect, exposure , One or more parameters in Sensitivity. And/or, obtain one or more editing parameters related to the editing process performed by the user, such as trimming ratio, adjusting filter color, adjusting beautification parameters, and adjusting brightness level, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
参数存储模块可以保存一种或多种拍摄参数,一种或多种编辑参数等。The parameter storage module can store one or more shooting parameters, one or more editing parameters and the like.
文件生成模块可以根据拍摄过程中的一种或多种拍摄参数,生成拍摄指导文件。以及,根据用户编辑处理照片、视频等多媒体文件过程中的一种或多种编辑参数,生成编辑指导文件。该拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件等可以称为“模板文件”,一个或多个模板文件可以存储在参数存储模块,并建立和照片、视频等多媒体文件的关联关系。The file generation module can generate a shooting guidance file according to one or more shooting parameters in the shooting process. And, according to one or more editing parameters in the process of editing and processing multimedia files such as photos and videos by the user, an editing guidance file is generated. The shooting guidance file, editing guidance file, etc. can be called "template files", and one or more template files can be stored in the parameter storage module, and an association relationship with multimedia files such as photos and videos can be established.
Android runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(media libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),二维图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (media libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了二维图层和三维图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
二维图形引擎是二维绘图的绘图引擎。图像处理库可以提供针对各种图像数据的分析以及提供多种图像处理算法等,例如可以提供图像切割、图像融合、图像模糊、图像锐化等处理,此处不再赘述。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing. The image processing library can provide analysis for various image data and provide a variety of image processing algorithms, such as image cutting, image fusion, image blurring, image sharpening, etc., which will not be repeated here.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,当电子设备的显示屏上显示任意的应用界面(例如相机应用使用过程中的任意界面)时,可以基于视图系统、二维图形引擎、三维图形处理库、图像处理库等,依次进行应用界面的图像渲染、合成、图层处理等,最终在显示屏上显示相应的界面。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, when any application interface (such as any interface during the use of the camera application) is displayed on the display screen of the electronic device, it can be based on the view system, the two-dimensional graphics engine, and the three-dimensional graphics processing library , image processing library, etc., sequentially perform image rendering, synthesis, layer processing, etc. of the application interface, and finally display the corresponding interface on the display screen.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,蓝牙驱 动等。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, bluetooth driver and so on.
网络传输层可以包括蓝牙或Wi-Fi等通信模块,用于建立蓝牙传输通道、Wi-Fi传输通道等,实现发送端设备和接收端设备之间的文件传输。The network transmission layer may include communication modules such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi, which are used to establish Bluetooth transmission channels, Wi-Fi transmission channels, etc., to realize file transmission between the sending end device and the receiving end device.
在本申请实施例中,基于发送端设备和接收端设备的不同通信方式,内核层的驱动调用相应硬件模块,当发送端设备和接收端设备以蓝牙的方式传输一个或多个模板时,蓝牙驱动调用蓝牙芯片,使得蓝牙模块进入工作状态,基于网络传输层的蓝牙通信模块,建立蓝牙连接。In the embodiment of this application, based on the different communication modes between the sending end device and the receiving end device, the driver at the kernel layer calls the corresponding hardware module. When the sending end device and the receiving end device transmit one or more templates in the form of Bluetooth, the Bluetooth The driver invokes the Bluetooth chip to make the Bluetooth module enter the working state, and establish a Bluetooth connection based on the Bluetooth communication module of the network transport layer.
示例性的,如图2中的(b)图所示,发送端设备和接收端设备可以基于蓝牙或Wi-Fi等多种可能的传输方式进行“一个或多个模板”的传输,为了便于理解,本申请以下实施例将以具有图1和图2所示结构的手机和平板为例,以手机作为发送端设备,平板作为接收端设备,结合附图和应用场景,对本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法进行具体阐述。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 2 (b), the sending end device and the receiving end device can transmit "one or more templates" based on multiple possible transmission methods such as Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. It is understood that the following embodiments of the present application will take the mobile phone and tablet with the structure shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 as examples, the mobile phone as the sending end device, and the tablet as the receiving end device. The method for sharing multimedia files is described in detail.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一例设置拍摄指导功能的图形用户界面(graphical user interface,GUI)示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface (GUI) for setting a shooting guidance function provided by an embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,图3中的(a)图示出了手机在解锁模式下显示的主界面301,该主界面301可以包括顶端状态栏区域和界面显示区域,该顶端状态栏区域可以显示运营商标识、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络)的信号标识、手机的电量标识和当前时间等一种或多种内容,该界面显示区域显示了天气时钟组件以及手机上安装的多款应用程序(application,App)。可选地,应用程序可以包括电话、信息、图库、相机等。应理解,该主界面301还可以包括其他更多的内容或显示更多的应用程序,本申请实施例对手机主界面显示的内容不作限定。Exemplarily, (a) in FIG. 3 shows the
用户执行如图3中的(a)图所示的操作,点击相机应用的图标,响应于用户的操作,手机可以显示如图3中的(b)图所示的相机应用的主界面302。该相机应用的主界面302还可以称为“拍摄预览界面”,该拍摄预览界面中可以呈现不同的图像、画面,并将呈现的图像、画面称为“预览图像”或者“预览画面”。The user performs the operation shown in (a) in FIG. 3, clicks the icon of the camera application, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone can display the
应理解,如图3中的(b)图所示,拍摄预览界面302可以包括底端导航区域、中间的预览画面的显示区域和顶端菜单区域。示例性的,如图3中的(b)图所示,在该拍摄预览界面302上,底端导航区域显示了拍摄快门控件31、本地相册控件32和摄像头切换控件33,此外还显示了夜景、人像、拍照、录像、专业等多种拍摄模式控件;中间的预览画面的显示区域用于显示当前手机摄像头捕获的图像或画面;顶端菜单区域可以显示一个或多个控件,例如闪光灯自动控制控件34、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)拍摄控件35和相机设置控件36等,本申请实施例对每一个区域显示的控件数量或种类不作限定。为了简便,本申请实施例对每一个控件的不同功能不作赘述。It should be understood that, as shown in (b) of FIG. 3 , the
一种可能的方式中,用户可以执行如图3中的(b)图所示的操作,点击相机设置控件36,响应于用户的操作,手机可以显示如图3中的(c)图所示的相机设置界面303。可选地,该相机设置界面303显示了多种与拍摄过程相关的设置选项,例如照片比例选项(例如设置照片比例为【4:3】)、声控拍照选项、笑脸抓拍选项等与拍摄照 片相关的设置选项,以及视频分辨率选项(例如设置视频画面比例为【16:9】,视频分辨率为1080p)、视频帧率选项等与录制视频相关的设置选项,以及参考线选项、定时拍摄选项等通用设置选项,本申请实施例对每一个选项的功能不作赘述。In one possible way, the user can perform the operation shown in (b) in Figure 3, click the
可选地,本申请实施例可以在通用设置相关的选项中,增加“拍摄指导”选项,用户可以通过该“拍摄指导”选项的开关,手动开启本申请实施例提供的拍摄指导的功能。应理解,该“拍摄指导”选项还可以添加在其他选项或菜单中,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the embodiment of the present application may add a "Shooting Guidance" option in the options related to the general settings, and the user can manually enable the shooting guidance function provided by the embodiment of the present application by switching the "Shooting Guidance" option. It should be understood that the "shooting guidance" option may also be added to other options or menus, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,用户执行如图3中的(c)图所示的操作1,点击“拍摄指导”选项对应的开关,响应于用户的操作,该“拍摄指导”选项的开关显示为开启(ON)状态,手机开启了拍摄指导的功能;再执行如图3中的(c)图所示的操作2,点击“返回”控件,响应于用户的操作,手机可以返回到拍摄预览界面,显示如图3中的(d)图所示的界面304。Exemplarily, the user performs
相应地,相比于图3中的(b)图所示的拍摄预览界面302,当用户开启相机应用的拍摄指导功能之后,图3中的(d)图所示的界面304中的顶端菜单区域可以显示拍摄指导控件37,本申请实施例对拍摄指导控件37的显示样式不作限定。Correspondingly, compared with the
另一种可能的方式中,开发人员在开发相机应用的拍摄指导功能的过程中,可以配置该拍摄指导控件37一直显示在该拍摄预览界面中,该拍摄预览界面可以一直显示如图3中的(d)图所示,用户可以点击该拍摄指导控件37快捷地开启相机应用拍摄指导的功能,使得操作过程更加便捷。In another possible manner, during the process of developing the shooting guidance function of the camera application, the developer may configure the
可选地,该拍摄指导控件37可以具有不同的显示状态,例如:灰色或者叠加箭头标记的非工作状态,或者,黑色或者无箭头标记的工作状态。该拍摄指导控件37的显示方式可以参照闪光灯自动控制控件34、AI拍摄控件35等控件的显示,用户可以点击该拍摄指导控件37,实现不同的显示状态之间的切换。Optionally, the
又一种可能的方式中,开发人员在开发相机应用的拍摄指导功能的过程中,可以配置该拍摄指导的功能默认为开启的状态。In another possible manner, during the process of developing the shooting guidance function of the camera application, the developer may configure the shooting guidance function to be enabled by default.
可选地,开发人员可以在开发过程中,将拍摄指导的功能配置为手机系统的预设功能、相机应用的预设功能或关联的图库应用的预设功能,本申请实施例对此不作限定。该方式不需要用户额外的操作去开启该拍摄指导的功能,从而可以简化用户的操作。Optionally, during the development process, the developer can configure the function of shooting guidance as the preset function of the mobile phone system, the preset function of the camera application, or the preset function of the associated gallery application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application . This method does not require additional operations by the user to enable the shooting guidance function, thereby simplifying the user's operations.
这里需要说明的,当该拍摄指导的功能被配置为电子设备的预设功能时,已经经过用户的授权,即授权相机应用、图库应用等多个关联应用可以调用该拍摄指导的功能,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It needs to be explained here that when the function of the shooting guide is configured as the preset function of the electronic device, it has been authorized by the user, that is, multiple associated applications such as the authorized camera application and the gallery application can call the function of the shooting guide. The embodiment does not limit this.
此外,当用户不需要使用该拍摄指导的功能时,本申请实施例还可以支持用户通过相机应用的设置控件关闭该预设功能;或者,通过图库应用的某个菜单或控件关闭该预设功能;又或者,通过系统级的设置应用相关的菜单关闭该预设功能,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In addition, when the user does not need to use the shooting guidance function, the embodiment of the present application can also support the user to turn off the preset function through the setting control of the camera application; or turn off the preset function through a certain menu or control of the gallery application ; Or, turn off the default function through the menu related to the system-level setting application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
当开启了手机或相机应用的拍摄指导的功能之后,用户可以通过相机应用拍摄或制作照片、动态图片(动图)、视频片段等多媒体文件。After the shooting guidance function of the mobile phone or the camera application is turned on, the user can take or create multimedia files such as photos, dynamic pictures (moving pictures), and video clips through the camera application.
下面实施例将结合附图,以用户拍摄照片的过程为例,介绍用户拍摄照片的过程, 后续分享照片的过程,以及接收端设备如何根据发送端设备分享的照片拍摄出具有相同显示效果的照片的实现过程。The following embodiment will use the accompanying drawings as an example to introduce the process of taking photos by users, the process of sharing photos later, and how the receiving device can take photos with the same display effect based on the photos shared by the sending device. realization process.
一种可能的场景中,在拍摄照片的过程中,用户可以根据自己的拍摄需求,手动调整一种或多种的拍摄参数,例如用户可以执行调节焦距、切换摄像头、调节美颜级别等一种或多种操作,从而调整对应的拍摄参数。In a possible scenario, in the process of taking photos, the user can manually adjust one or more shooting parameters according to his own shooting needs, for example, the user can perform a function such as adjusting the focal length, switching cameras, and adjusting the beauty level, etc. or multiple operations to adjust the corresponding shooting parameters.
示例性的,表1列举了多种可能的用户操作以及用户操作能够调整的拍摄参数。如表1所示,用户可以执行表1中列举的一种或多种操作,每一种用户操作可以作用于不同的对象,从而修改当前拍摄的实际拍摄参数。Exemplarily, Table 1 lists various possible user operations and shooting parameters that can be adjusted by the user operations. As shown in Table 1, the user can perform one or more operations listed in Table 1, and each user operation can act on a different object, thereby modifying the actual shooting parameters of the current shooting.
表1Table 1
结合表1的内容,以用户调节焦距的操作为例,用户可以根据拍摄对象的运动状态等,修改拍摄照片过程的变焦模式,例如单次自动对焦(auto focus single,AF-S)模式、连续自动对焦(auto focus continue,AF-C)模式、手动调焦(manual focus,MF)模式之间的切换。其中,AF-S模式可以用于拍摄静态主体,AF-C模式可以用于持续运动主体的对焦,MF模式可以用于拍摄无法预知的运动主体等,用户可以结合当前的拍摄需求,设置不同的变焦模式,不同的变焦模式下拍摄不同的对象,对应不同的焦距参数。Combining the contents of Table 1, taking the operation of adjusting the focus by the user as an example, the user can modify the zoom mode in the process of taking photos according to the motion state of the subject, such as single auto focus (auto focus single, AF-S) mode, continuous focus, etc. Switch between auto focus (auto focus continue, AF-C) mode and manual focus (manual focus, MF) mode. Among them, AF-S mode can be used to shoot static subjects, AF-C mode can be used to focus on continuous moving subjects, MF mode can be used to shoot unpredictable moving subjects, etc. Users can combine different shooting needs to set different Zoom mode, shooting different objects in different zoom modes, corresponding to different focal length parameters.
或者,以用户调节拍摄照片时的美颜级别为例,用户在拍摄过程中可以开启美颜处理功能,并根据拍摄需求,调整美颜级别,例如手机上可以提供给用户0-10级不同的美颜级别,不同的美颜级别可以对应不同的人物肤色、肤质、光滑度等美颜参数,此处不再赘述。Or, take the user adjusting the beauty level when taking photos as an example, the user can turn on the beauty processing function during the shooting process, and adjust the beauty level according to the shooting needs, for example, the mobile phone can provide the user with different levels of 0-10 Beautification level, different beautification levels can correspond to different beautification parameters such as skin color, skin texture, smoothness, etc., which will not be repeated here.
应理解,以上结合表1介绍了用户可能执行的一种或多种操作,任意一种或多种用户操作的组合可以称为“用户的元操作”,“用户的元操作”可以由用户主动发起,例如包括:调节分辨率、调节焦距、切换镜头、调节美颜级别等各种涉及修改拍摄参数的操作中的一种或多种,本申请实施例对“用户的元操作”包括的操作数量、种类不作限定。It should be understood that one or more operations that may be performed by the user are introduced in conjunction with Table 1 above, and any combination of one or more user operations can be called "user's meta-operation", and "user's meta-operation" can be initiated by the user Initiate, for example, including: adjusting the resolution, adjusting the focus, switching lenses, adjusting the beauty level, etc., one or more of various operations involving modification of shooting parameters, the embodiments of this application include the operations included in the "user's meta-operations" The quantity and type are not limited.
需要说明的是,以上介绍的“用户的元操作”可以发生在拍摄之前,例如拍摄之前用户设置了拍摄照片的分辨率、照片比例、照片占据的储存空间大小等。It should be noted that the "user's meta-operation" described above can occur before shooting, for example, before shooting, the user sets the resolution of the photo, the ratio of the photo, the size of the storage space occupied by the photo, etc.
或者,该一种或多种用户操作可以发生在拍摄过程中,例如用户正在拍摄时,可 以开启美颜功能,调整当前拍摄的美颜级别。Alternatively, the one or more user operations can occur during shooting, for example, when the user is shooting, the beautification function can be turned on to adjust the beautification level of the current shooting.
又或者,对于录制视频的过程,用户录制视频的过程中可以进行前置摄像头和后置摄像头等多个摄像头的切换,本申请实施例对“用户的元操作”的发生时机不作限定。Alternatively, for the video recording process, the user may switch multiple cameras such as the front camera and the rear camera during the video recording process, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit the occurrence timing of the "user's meta-operation".
另一种可能的场景中,手机作为智能化的电子设备,可以结合当前所处的拍摄环境,和/或,基于智能化的软件算法等,自动调整拍摄过程涉及的一种或多种拍摄参数。In another possible scenario, the mobile phone, as an intelligent electronic device, can automatically adjust one or more shooting parameters involved in the shooting process in combination with the current shooting environment, and/or based on intelligent software algorithms, etc. .
示例性的,在拍摄过程中,手机可以对拍摄对象进行自动追焦;或者,手机检测拍摄环境,并在拍摄环境较暗的夜间时段,可以自动调节拍摄亮度;又或者,手机的各种AI识别等能力项可以自动进行相关参数的调整,本申请实施例对手机可以自动调整的参数种类不作限定。Exemplarily, during the shooting process, the mobile phone can automatically focus on the subject; or, the mobile phone detects the shooting environment, and can automatically adjust the shooting brightness during the night when the shooting environment is dark; or, various AI of the mobile phone Capability items such as recognition can automatically adjust related parameters, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the types of parameters that can be automatically adjusted by the mobile phone.
应理解,以上介绍的“用户调整一种或多种拍摄参数”、“手机自动调整一种或多种拍摄参数”的过程都会引起所拍摄照片的显示效果的变化,换言之,用户拍摄的每一张照片、录制的每一个视频片段等,可能会因为不同的拍摄参数,具有不同的显示效果。It should be understood that the processes of "the user adjusts one or more shooting parameters" and "the mobile phone automatically adjusts one or more shooting parameters" described above will cause changes in the display effect of the photos taken. Each photo, each recorded video clip, etc. may have different display effects due to different shooting parameters.
在本申请实施例中,将所有可能“引起所拍摄照片的显示效果变化的对象”称为“操作对象”,该“操作对象”既可以包括用户主动发起的,也可以包括手机自动调整的,且每一种操作对象都可以导致拍摄参数的变化,进而引起所拍摄照片的显示效果的不同。在后续实施例的介绍中,将不再区分该“操作对象”是用户主动发起的,还是电子设备的智能化操作引起的。In the embodiment of this application, all possible "objects that cause changes in the display effect of the photographed photos" are called "operation objects", and the "operation objects" can include those initiated by the user or automatically adjusted by the mobile phone. And each operation object can lead to a change of shooting parameters, which in turn causes a difference in the display effect of the captured photos. In the introduction of subsequent embodiments, it will not be distinguished whether the "operation object" is initiated by the user or caused by the intelligent operation of the electronic device.
示例性的,该“操作对象”可以包括的相关内容列举如下表2。Exemplarily, the relevant content that the "operation object" may include is listed in Table 2 below.
表2中列举了多种操作对象、每一种操作对象对应的显示效果、所适用的拍摄模式、以及可以被调整或修改的时机等内容。Table 2 lists a variety of operation objects, the display effect corresponding to each operation object, the applicable shooting mode, and the timing that can be adjusted or modified.
可选地,每一种引起所拍摄照片的效果变化的操作对象可以对应不同的调整或修改的时机。Optionally, each type of operation object that causes a change in the effect of the captured photo may correspond to a different timing for adjustment or modification.
示例性的,对于分辨率,可以支持用户在拍摄照片之前进行调节,而不支持拍摄过程中进行调节;对于镜头,可以支持用户在拍摄照片之前进行选择,也可以支持在拍摄过程中进行切换,此处不再一一赘述。Exemplarily, for the resolution, the user can be supported to adjust before taking the photo, but not during the shooting process; for the lens, the user can be supported to select before taking the photo, and it can also support switching during the shooting, No more details here.
表2Table 2
下面结合表2列举的一种或多种操作对象,以用户某次实际拍摄一张照片的过程为例介绍本申请实施例的实现过程。Combining with one or more operation objects listed in Table 2, the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application will be introduced by taking the process of actually taking a photo by a user as an example.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一例拍摄照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo taking process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,在相机应用的拍摄预览界面401中,用户执行如图4中的(a)图所示的操作,用户手动点击放大倍数控件39,并调整拍摄的放大倍数由“1×”变化为“1.5×”,手机可以显示如图4中的(b)图所示的界面402。再执行如图4中的(b)图所示的操作,点击美颜功能的控件38,响应于用户的操作,手机开启了与拍摄相关的美颜功能,并显示如图4中的(c)图所示的界面403,在该界面403中,显示了1-10级不同的美颜级别,用户可以手动选择所需要的美颜级别,例如用户调整当前拍摄照片时对应的美颜级别为8级。Exemplarily, in the
用户完成了相关的设置之后,返回到如图4中的(d)图所示的拍摄预览界面404,按照上述用户手动修改的拍摄参数,当前拍摄预览界面404上显示的预览图像(包括“大人和小孩”的画面)具有“1.5×”放大、8级美颜处理之后的显示效果。After the user completes the relevant settings, he returns to the
可选地,用户还可以手动设置更多的显示效果,例如添加不同的滤镜、添加不同的挂件、图标等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the user can also manually set more display effects, such as adding different filters, adding different widgets, icons, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
用户执行如图4中的(d)图所示的操作,点击拍摄快门控件31,响应于用户的拍摄操作,手机获取当前具有“1.5×”放大、8级美颜处理之后的预览图像,并将该预览图像作为拍摄所得的照片保存到本地相册。可选地,该拍摄的照片可以以缩略图的形式显示在本地相册控件31中,此处不再赘述。The user performs the operation shown in (d) of Figure 4, clicks the
还应理解,在本申请实施例中,“1.0×”的放大倍数、“1.5×”的放大倍数等可以理解为从用户视觉角度描述的拍摄预览界面中预览图像具有的显示效果,具体地,不同的放大倍数可以对应不同的焦距,用户使用不同的焦距拍摄照片时,可以呈现给用户不同的显示效果,后续对此不再赘述。It should also be understood that in this embodiment of the application, the magnification of "1.0×" and "1.5×" can be understood as the display effect of the preview image in the shooting preview interface described from the user's perspective. Specifically, Different magnifications can correspond to different focal lengths. When users use different focal lengths to take photos, different display effects can be presented to users, which will not be repeated in the future.
一种可能的实现方式中,在本申请实施例中,如果用户已经按照前述图3中介绍的任意一种方式开启了相机应用的拍摄指导的功能,此后,对于用户拍摄的每一张照 片,相机应用可以记录用户拍摄照片的过程,获取该照片对应的拍摄参数,并可以根据该照片对应的拍摄参数生成“拍摄指导文件”。In a possible implementation, in the embodiment of this application, if the user has enabled the shooting guidance function of the camera application according to any of the methods described in Figure 3 above, after that, for each photo taken by the user, The camera application can record the process of the user taking a photo, obtain the shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, and can generate a "shooting guidance file" according to the shooting parameters corresponding to the photo.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,每一张照片对应的拍摄参数可以包括用户手动调整的一种或多种拍摄参数、手机自动调整一种或多种拍摄参数等所有会引起该照片的显示效果变化的相关参数。Optionally, in this embodiment of the application, the shooting parameters corresponding to each photo may include one or more shooting parameters manually adjusted by the user, one or more shooting parameters automatically adjusted by the mobile phone, etc. Displays parameters related to effect changes.
针对图4中列举的场景,假设用户根据如图4中的(d)图所示的预览图像,拍摄得到了包括“大人和小孩”的照片1,表3相应地列举了用户拍摄该照片1的过程中,手机的相机应用记录的该照片1的实际拍摄参数,具体包括拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数。For the scene listed in Figure 4, it is assumed that the user has taken a
表3table 3
示例性的,结合表2中每一种操作对象可以对应的不同的调整时机,表3列举的内容可以被划分为包括“拍摄前的操作对象”和“拍摄中的操作对象”。Exemplarily, in combination with the different adjustment timings that each operation object in Table 2 may correspond to, the content listed in Table 3 may be divided into "operation objects before shooting" and "operation objects during shooting".
例如,对于焦距、美颜等操作对象,可以支持用户在拍摄前进行调节,也可以支持用户在拍摄过程中进行调节,因此,焦距、美颜等操作对象可以同时包括于“拍摄前的操作对象”和“拍摄中的操作对象”中,且可以对应不同的实际拍摄参数。For example, for operation objects such as focal length and beautification, users can be supported to adjust before shooting, and users can also be supported to adjust during shooting. " and "Operation Objects During Shooting", and can correspond to different actual shooting parameters.
对于分辨率、地址位置等操作对象,仅支持用户在拍摄前进行调节,不支持用户在拍摄过程中进行调节,因此,分辨率、地址位置等操作对象可以仅包括于“拍摄前的操作对象”中,此处不再一一赘述。For operation objects such as resolution and address location, users are only allowed to adjust before shooting, and users are not supported to adjust during shooting. Therefore, operation objects such as resolution and address location can only be included in the "operation objects before shooting" , will not be repeated here.
可选地,对于任意一张照片,可能同时包括表3中列举拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数。且该拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数中可能包括相同的参数类型。当某一张照片对应的拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数中同时包括同一种类型的参数时,可以以呈现给用户的显示效果对应的最终参数为准。Optionally, for any photo, the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting may be included at the same time. In addition, the shooting parameters before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting may include the same parameter type. When the shooting parameters before shooting and shooting parameters corresponding to a certain photo include the same type of parameters at the same time, the final parameters corresponding to the display effect presented to the user may prevail.
示例性的,例如表3中列举拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数都包括了“美颜级别参数”,那么该美颜级别可以是拍摄前的美颜级别、拍摄中的美颜级别叠加之后呈现给用户的显示效果对应的最终美颜级别为准,并保存在“拍摄指导文件”中,申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, for example, the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting and the shooting parameters during shooting all include "beauty level parameters", then the beauty level can be the beauty level before shooting, the beauty level during shooting The final beautification level corresponding to the display effect presented to the user after superimposition shall prevail, and shall be saved in the "shooting guidance file", which is not limited in the embodiment of the application.
可选地,对于每一张照片,拍摄完成保存到本地图库之后,用户还可以对该照片执行编辑操作,或者说,该照片可以经过用户的编辑处理。Optionally, for each photo, after the photo is taken and saved to the local library, the user can also perform an editing operation on the photo, or in other words, the photo can be edited by the user.
示例性的,用户可以执行修剪照片比例、调整照片的滤镜色彩、调整美颜级别等一种或多种编辑操作。例如用户在拍摄完成后,可以修改照片的美颜级别,和/或调整照片的亮度,和/或为照片增加了滤镜色彩等。Exemplarily, the user may perform one or more editing operations such as trimming the ratio of the photo, adjusting the filter color of the photo, and adjusting the beauty level. For example, after the shooting is completed, the user can modify the beauty level of the photo, and/or adjust the brightness of the photo, and/or add a filter color to the photo, etc.
应理解,用户对照片执行的编辑操作时,所有与照片的显示效果相关的参数,或者说可能改变照片显示效果的参数称为“编辑参数”。It should be understood that when a user performs an editing operation on a photo, all parameters related to the display effect of the photo, or parameters that may change the display effect of the photo are called "editing parameters".
一种可能的实现方式中,对于用户编辑的每一张照片,手机的图库应用可以记录用户编辑该照片的过程涉及的所有编辑参数,并根据编辑参数生成“编辑指导文件”。In a possible implementation manner, for each photo edited by the user, the gallery application of the mobile phone may record all editing parameters involved in the process of editing the photo by the user, and generate an "editing guidance file" according to the editing parameters.
图5是本申请实施例提供的一例编辑照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of photo editing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,假设用户根据如图4中的(d)图所示的预览图像,拍摄得到了包括“大人和小孩”的照片1,用户可以执行如图5中的(a)图所示的操作,点击界面501上的本地相册控件32,响应于用户的点击操作,手机显示如图5中的(b)图所示的照片1的详情界面502,该界面502上显示了照片1的图像,以及分享、收藏、编辑、删除和更多等多个用户可执行的操作选项。用户点击编辑选项,响应于用户的操作,手机显示如图5中的(c)图所示的编辑界面503,该编辑界面503上显示了照片1的图像,以及修剪、滤镜、调节和更多等多个用户可执行的编辑操作选项,为了简便,本申请实施例对每个选项的功能不作赘述。Exemplarily, assuming that the user takes a
示例性的,假设用户通过“修剪”选项,执行如图5中的(c)图所示的操作1,修改照片1的照片比例为【4:3】;通过“滤镜”选项,为该照片1添加了“清纯”的滤镜效果,通过“调节”选项,调节了照片1的亮度至9级;并执行如图5中的(c)图所示的操作2,点击界面503右上角的“保存”控件,响应于用户的操作,将保存用户执行的编辑操作并按照用户的编辑操作对该照片1进行相应的编辑处理,最终该照片1显示如图5中的(d)图所示的界面504。该界面504上以用户编辑处理后的显示效果显示该照片1的图像。应理解,本申请实施例对用户执行编辑操作的顺序、次数等不作限定。Exemplarily, assuming that the user performs
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,编辑操作的“操作对象”可以包括的相关内容列举如下表4。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, relevant content that may be included in the "operation object" of the editing operation is listed in Table 4 below.
应理解,表4中的“操作对象”可以是用户在界面502中点击“编辑”选项之后,可能由用户手动选择并触发的,或者由手机自动启动并触发的,且每一种编辑操作的操作对象都可以导致照片的显示效果的变化。It should be understood that the "operation object" in Table 4 may be manually selected and triggered by the user after the user clicks the "Edit" option on the
表4Table 4
可选地,如果某一张照片经过多次编辑操作,该编辑操作可以是连续的编辑操作。Optionally, if a certain photo has undergone multiple editing operations, the editing operations may be continuous editing operations.
示例性的,假设照片1经过第一次编辑处理、第二次编辑处理和第三次编辑处理,那么第二次编辑处理的照片可以是针对经过第一次编辑处理后得到的照片1为基础进行的,第三次编辑处理可以是以经过第二次编辑处理后得到的照片1为基础进行的。经过第二次编辑处理的照片1可以覆盖且替换经过第一次编辑处理后得到的照片1,第三次编辑处理可以覆盖且替换经过第二次编辑处理后得到的照片1,最终手机的本地相册中仅保留第三次编辑处理之后得到的照片1,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, assuming that
或者,该编辑操作可以是重复针对原始文件执行的独立的编辑操作。Alternatively, the editing operation may be a separate editing operation performed repeatedly on the original file.
示例性的,照片1经过第一次编辑处理得到中间文件1,第二次编辑处理是针对原始照片1进行的并得到中间文件2,第三次编辑处理也是针对原始拍摄的照片1进行的得到中间文件3,且中间文件1、中间文件2和中间文件3是独立的,没有参数之间的叠加或替换关系,可以都保存在手机的本地相册,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily,
在本申请实施例中,可以将拍摄完成且没有经过任何编辑处理的原始照片1称为该照片1的“原始文件”,将经过第一次编辑处理得到的照片1称为该照片1的“中间文件1”,第二次编辑处理得到的照片1称为该照片1的“中间文件2”,以此类推,该照片1的“中间文件1”、“中间文件2”也可以都保存在手机的本地相册,将第三次编辑处理得到的照片1称为该照片1的“最终文件”,后续不再赘述。In this embodiment of the application, the
示例性的,针对图5所示的用户执行的编辑操作过程,假设用户对拍摄的照片1(“大人和小孩”)做了表5所列举的编辑处理,手机的图库应用可以记录如表5所示的该照片1的一种或多种编辑参数,并根据一种或多种编辑参数,生成该照片1的编辑指导文件。Exemplarily, for the editing operation process performed by the user shown in FIG. 5 , assuming that the user has performed the editing process listed in Table 5 on the photograph 1 (“adult and child”) taken, the gallery application of the mobile phone can record as shown in Table 5. One or more editing parameters of the
表5table 5
应理解,表5可以是经过一次编辑处理对应的编辑参数,如果照片1经过第一次编辑处理、第二次编辑处理和第三次编辑处理,那么,每一次编辑处理都可以包括如表5所示的一种或多种编辑参数,此处不再一一赘述。It should be understood that Table 5 can be the editing parameters corresponding to one editing process. If the
通过上述过程,用户在手机上拍摄的每一张照片,都可以在用户拍摄完成之后,生成唯一对应的“拍摄指导文件”,以及,该照片如果经过用户的编辑处理之后,生成一个或多个“编辑指导文件”。Through the above process, each photo taken by the user on the mobile phone can generate a unique corresponding "shooting guidance file" after the user takes the photo, and if the photo is edited and processed by the user, one or more "Editorial Guidance Document".
这里需要说明的是,对于一张照片,可能同时包括表3中列举拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数,还可能包括表4或表5中列举的编辑参数,且该拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数、编辑参数中可能包括相同的参数类型。该场景可以参照前述介绍的实现方式,当某一张照片对应的参数同时包括同一种类型的参数时,可以以呈现给用户的显示效果对应的最终参数为准。What needs to be explained here is that for a photo, it may include the shooting parameters listed in Table 3 before shooting, the shooting parameters during shooting, and the editing parameters listed in Table 4 or Table 5, and the shooting parameters before shooting Parameters, shooting parameters in shooting, editing parameters may include the same parameter type. For this scenario, refer to the implementation described above. When the parameters corresponding to a certain photo include parameters of the same type at the same time, the final parameters corresponding to the display effect presented to the user may prevail.
示例性的,例如表3中列举拍摄前的拍摄参数、拍摄中的拍摄参数、编辑参数中都包括了“美颜级别参数”,那么该美颜级别可以是拍摄前的美颜级别、拍摄中的美颜级别的叠加,记录并保存该美颜级别参数到该照片的“拍摄指导文件”中;用户执行编辑操作时,调整了该照片的美颜级别,该编辑操作相关的编辑参数可以保存在“编辑指导文件”中,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, for example, the shooting parameters before shooting, shooting parameters during shooting, and editing parameters listed in Table 3 all include "beauty level parameters", then the beauty level can be the beauty level before shooting, during shooting Superimposition of the beauty level of the photo, record and save the beauty level parameters in the "shooting guidance file" of the photo; when the user performs an editing operation and adjusts the beauty level of the photo, the editing parameters related to the editing operation can be saved In the "Editing Guidance Document", this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
可选地,对于任意一张照片,如果该照片是用户使用手机的相机应用拍摄的,那么可以在该照片保存到本地相册时,生成该照片的拍摄指导文件。Optionally, for any photo, if the photo is taken by the user using the camera application of the mobile phone, when the photo is saved to the local photo album, a shooting guidance file for the photo can be generated.
如果该照片是用户从网络、服务器下载的,或者该照片是手机接收其他用户发送的,那么可以在该照片被保存到本地相册时,可以检测该照片的一种或多种拍摄参数,生成该照片的“拍摄指导文件”。If the photo is downloaded by the user from the network or server, or the photo is received by the mobile phone from other users, then when the photo is saved to the local album, one or more shooting parameters of the photo can be detected to generate the photo "Shooting Instructions Document" for photos.
对于任意一张照片,生成该照片的“编辑指导文件”的时机可以是用户执行编辑操作并保存该编辑操作时。For any photo, the time to generate the "editing guidance file" of the photo may be when the user performs an editing operation and saves the editing operation.
此外,用户可以对一张照片执行一次或多次编辑操作,相应地,每一次编辑操作结束,编辑“保存”控件,可以保存用户执行的该编辑操作,并更新编辑参数,覆盖该照片的“编辑指导文件”;或者,手机可以检测用户执行的每一次编辑操作,并针对每一次编辑操作的一种或多种编辑参数,生成并保存一个新的编辑指导文件。In addition, the user can perform one or more editing operations on a photo. Correspondingly, after each editing operation ends, the editing "save" control can save the editing operation performed by the user, update the editing parameters, and overwrite the "save" control of the photo. Editing Guidance File”; or, the mobile phone may detect each editing operation performed by the user, and generate and save a new editing guidance file for one or more editing parameters of each editing operation.
由上可知,每一张照片可以对应一个或多个编辑指导文件,换言之,该一个或多个编辑指导文件都和该照片相关联。It can be known from the above that each photo may correspond to one or more editing guidance files, in other words, the one or more editing guidance files are all associated with the photo.
可选地,每一张照片可以通过多种可能的方式和该照片的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Optionally, each photo can be associated or bound with the photo's "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" in various possible ways.
一种可能的实现方式中,每一张照片可以通过文件名和该照片的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。In a possible implementation manner, each photo may be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the photo through the file name.
或者,通过为每一张照片生成唯一的哈希值和该照片的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Alternatively, a unique hash value is generated for each photo to associate or bind with the photo's "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file".
又或者,通过为每一张照片预设的关键值和该照片的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the key value preset for each photo is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the photo, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,表6列举了多张照片和“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定的方式。Exemplarily, Table 6 lists the manners of associating or binding multiple photos with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file".
示例性的,对于用户拍摄的每一张照片,当用户拍摄完该照片并自动存储到本地相册时,手机可以为该照片自动生成唯一的照片名称,例如IMG-2021-12-1。那么,手机可以根据该照片的名称和预设规则自动生成该照片的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件的名称。例如在该照片名称后增加后缀-D作为该照片的拍摄指导文件的名称,生成该照片对应的拍摄指导文件IMG-2021-12-1-D;在该照片名称后增加后缀-E作为该照片的编辑指导文件的名称,生成该照片对应的编辑指导文件IMG-2021-12-1-E,并保存和该照片相关联的“拍摄指导文件”和“编辑指导文件”。Exemplarily, for each photo taken by the user, when the user finishes taking the photo and automatically stores it in the local photo album, the mobile phone can automatically generate a unique photo name for the photo, such as IMG-2021-12-1. Then, the mobile phone can automatically generate the name of the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file of the photo according to the name of the photo and preset rules. For example, add the suffix -D after the photo name as the name of the shooting guide file for the photo, and generate the corresponding shooting guide file IMG-2021-12-1-D; add the suffix -E after the photo name as the photo The name of the editing guidance file, generate the editing guidance file IMG-2021-12-1-E corresponding to the photo, and save the "shooting guidance file" and "editing guidance file" associated with the photo.
表6Table 6
这里需要说明的是,在表6中,假设照片1是用户按照图4所示的操作拍摄的且按照图5所示的编辑过程进行了多次编辑处理,那么该照片1可以有对应的拍摄指导文件:照片1-D,且有对应的第一次编辑的编辑指导文件1:照片1-E1;第二次编辑的编辑指导文件2:照片1-E2;第三次编辑的编辑指导文件3:照片1-E3。What needs to be explained here is that in Table 6, assuming that
其中,用户拍摄完成且没有经过任何编辑处理的照片1为该照片1的“原始文件”,该照片1的原始文件对应1个拍摄指导文件;将经过第一次编辑处理得到的照片1为该照片1的“中间文件1”,第二次编辑处理得到的照片1称为该照片1的“中间文件2”,第三次编辑处理得到的照片1为该照片1的“最终文件”。Among them, the
假设用户拍摄了照片2且没有对照片2进行编辑,那么该照片2可以有对应的拍摄指导文件:照片2-D,且没有对应的编辑指导文件,表5中以“/”表示。Assuming that the user took
假设照片3不是用户通过手机拍摄的,例如照片3是用户从网络平台下载的照片,但是用户对该照片3进行编辑操作,那么用户将该照片3保存到本地相册时,手机也 可以检测并获取该照片3的拍摄参数,并生成拍摄指导文件:照片3-D;经过用户一次编辑操作后,根据编辑参数,生成该照片3的编辑指导文件:照片3-E。Assuming that
还需要说明的是,对于某一张照片,也可以没有对应的拍摄指导文件,仅包括用户执行编辑操作之后生成的编辑指导文件,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should also be noted that for a certain photo, there may not be a corresponding shooting guidance file, and only editing guidance files generated after the user performs editing operations are included, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
当手机生成了每一张照片的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件之后,用户可以通过本申请实施例提供的方法,将用户选择的照片分享给接收端设备,同时,用户还可以选择将该照片对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件也分享给接收端设备,以便于接收端设备接收文件之后,可以根据该照片的拍摄指导文件,拍摄出相同显示效果的更多照片,和/或,根据该照片的编辑指导文件,快速地获取相同显示效果的更多照片。After the mobile phone generates the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file for each photo, the user can share the photo selected by the user to the receiving device through the method provided in the embodiment of this application. The shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to the photo is also shared with the receiving device, so that after receiving the file, the receiving device can take more photos with the same display effect according to the shooting guidance file of the photo, and/or , quickly obtain more photos with the same display effect according to the editing guidance file of the photo.
一种可能的实现方式中,当每一张照片的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件生成之后,用户触发分享某照片的操作时,只要用户选择了期望分享的待分享照片,相应地,与该待分享照片相关的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等一个或多个文件都可以显示给用户,供用户手动选择一个或多个文件,实现按需分享。In a possible implementation, when the user triggers the operation of sharing a certain photo after the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file of each photo is generated, as long as the user selects the desired photo to be shared, correspondingly, the One or more files such as shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files related to the photos to be shared can be displayed to the user for the user to manually select one or more files to realize on-demand sharing.
下面将结合附图6至附图10介绍从发送端设备(手机)向接收端设备(平板)分享前述拍摄的照片1的过程。The process of sharing the previously taken
图6是本申请实施例提供的一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,图6中的(a)图所示的界面601显示了用户前述实施例中拍摄的照片1的图像,以及分享、收藏、编辑、删除和更多等多个用户可执行的操作选项。用户点击分享选项,响应于用户的操作,手机进入分享该照片1的流程,可以显示如图6中的(b)图所示的界面602。Exemplarily, the
可选地,该界面602上可以显示照片1(包括“大人和小孩”的照片)的缩略图、照片2(人脸照片)等一张或多张本地照片的缩略图,还可以显示与待分享的照片1相关的一种或多种文件名称控件,以及Huawei Share、微信应用分享、蓝牙、信息、电子邮件等一种或多种分享方式对应的选项。其中,该照片1为被选中的待分享照片,该照片1的缩略图的右下角的选择框默认为被选中的状态,照片2的缩略图的右下角的选择框为未被选中的状态。Optionally, the
一种可能的显示方式中,该界面602上可以以文件列表的形式显示与待分享的照片1相关的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种。In a possible display manner, the
示例性的,结合表6介绍的内容,该照片1对应的文件可以包括:拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2、编辑指导文件3、原始文件(没有经过任何编辑处理的照片1)、中间文件1(经过第一次编辑处理得到的照片1)、中间文件2(经过第二次编辑处理得到的照片1)、最终文件(经过第三次编辑处理得到的照片1)。Exemplarily, in combination with the content introduced in Table 6, the files corresponding to the
可选地,该照片1作为被选中的待分享照片,该照片1的缩略图的右下角的选择框默认为被选中的状态,且该照片1对应的文件列表中的“原始文件”默认为被选中的状态,即该界面602上的“原始文件”控件显示为勾选状态。Optionally, the
可选地,当照片1对应多个编辑指导文件时,如图6中的(b)图所示,该界面602上可以仅显示一个编辑指导文件,如果用户选中该一个编辑指导文件的控件,即同时选中了该照片1的编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2和编辑指导文件3。Optionally, when the
或者,该界面602上可以独立地显示每一个编辑指导文件,例如以列表形式显示编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2和编辑指导文件3。用户可以根据分享需求,从多个编辑指导文件中选择期望分享的一个或多个,本申请实施例对文件显示方式不作限定。Alternatively, each editing guidance file may be independently displayed on the
用户执行如图6中的(b)图所示的操作1-操作2-操作3,点击选中该照片1的拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件,并点击“Huawei Share”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机确定该照片1对应的原始文件、拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件(例如包括编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2和编辑指导文件3)将作为“待分享的文件”,且显示如图6中的(c)图所示的界面603中,进一步为用户显示搜索到的一个或多个接收端设备的图标和/或设备名称,例如P30、MateBook等。The user performs operation 1-operation 2-
用户点击MateBook的图标或设备名称,响应于用户的点击操作,手机显示如图6中的(d)图所示的界面604,该界面604可以在MateBook的图标或设备名称位置处显示“MateBook正在接收中…”的提示信息,提示用户当前正在进行文件的传输,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The user clicks the MateBook icon or the device name, and in response to the user's click operation, the mobile phone displays an
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。其中,图7中的(a)图所示的界面701请参照前述界面601的介绍,此处不再赘述。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of the photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application. Wherein, for the
另一种可能的显示方式中,该照片1作为被选中的待分享照片,在如图7中的(b)图所示的界面702上,可以显示待分享的照片1关联的所有文件,例如该照片1关联的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……最终文件、拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2和编辑指导文件3等多种文件。In another possible display mode, the
可选地,在该界面702上,该照片1的缩略图的右下角的选择框默认为被选中的状态,且该照片1对应的文件列表中的“原始文件”也默认为被选中的状态,即该界面702上的“原始文件”控件显示为勾选状态。Optionally, on the
可选地,该界面702上还可以以缩略图的形式显示该照片1关联的原始文件、中间文件,且该照片1关联的原始文件、中间文件可以具有不同显示效果,以供用户预览不同的显示效果。Optionally, the
示例性的,如图7中的(b)图所示,在界面702上,并列显示了3张照片,每一张可以对应不同的静态预览效果。例如:Exemplarily, as shown in (b) of FIG. 7 , three photos are displayed side by side on the
第1张照片为照片1的原始文件呈现的拍摄效果:“大人和小孩”显示为较远距离。The first photo is the shooting effect presented by the original file of photo 1: "adults and children" are displayed at a relatively long distance.
第2张为照片1经过第一次编辑处理后呈现的显示效果:经过用户的第一次编辑处理,裁剪并修改了照片1的尺寸。The second picture is the display effect of
第3张为照片1在第一次编辑处理后又经过第二次编辑处理之后呈现的显示效果:和第2张图片尺寸相同,调整了照片的滤镜色彩和亮度等。The third picture is the display effect of
应理解,如果对该照片还执行了更多次数的编辑操作,用户还可以左右滑动以查看照片1的更多预览图片以及显示效果。It should be understood that if more editing operations are performed on the photo, the user can also swipe left and right to view more preview pictures and display effects of
可选地,该界面702上为显示该照片1的多种显示效果时,除了上述以多张图片的方式呈现静态预览图片之外,还可以以动态播放(例如跑马灯式的动态播放)的形式为用户播放多张该照片1的中间文件,呈现动态的预览效果。Optionally, when multiple display effects of the
示例性的,如果照片1对应多次编辑处理,该界面702上可以并列显示3张照片,第1张照片可以为照片1的原始文件呈现的拍摄效果,第2张呈现动态播放的预览效 果,在第2张照片中动态播放该照片1经过多次编辑处理后得到多个中间文件的显示效果,例如中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3….以t(例如2秒)为周期进行切换显示,第3张为照片1的最终文件呈现的显示效果。Exemplarily, if
或者,该界面702上并列显示了3张照片中还可以支持用户在线编辑,并为用户呈现在线编辑后的预览效果,供用户查看或修改编辑参数,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the
当用户执行如图7中的(b)图所示的操作1-操作2-操作3,手动点击选中该照片1的中间文件1、拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1,以及点击“Huawei Share”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机确定该照片1对应的原始文件、中间文件1、拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1将作为“待分享的文件”。用户在如图7中的(c)图所示的界面703中,点击选择MateBook作为接收端设备,将“待分享的文件”分享给MateBook,手机可以进一步在图7中的(d)图所示的界面704,显示“MateBook正在接收中…”的提示信息,提示用户当前正在进行文件的传输,此处不再赘述。When the user performs operation 1-operation 2-
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,用户点击图8中的(a)图所示的界面801上的分享选项,手机显示图8中的(b)图所示的界面802。Exemplarily, the user clicks the sharing option on the
另一种可能的显示方式中,在如界面802上,还可以包括悬浮显示的“联动分享”控件802-1,该“联动分享”控件802-1用于一键快捷地选中和照片1关联的所有文件。In another possible display mode, on the
示例性的,用户执行如图8中的(b)图所示的操作1,点击该“联动分享”控件802-1,响应于用户的操作,与照片1相关的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2、编辑指导文件3……都显示为被选中态。Exemplarily, the user performs
用户再执行如图8中的(b)图所示的操作2,点击“Huawei Share”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机确定该照片1的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2、编辑指导文件3……都作为“待分享的文件”。在如图8中的(c)图所示的界面803中,用户点击选择MateBook作为接收端设备,将“待分享的文件”分享给MateBook,并进一步在图8中的(d)图所示的界面804中显示“MateBook正在接收中…”的提示信息,提示用户当前正在进行文件的传输。The user then performs
上述显示方式,为用户提供了联动分享的方案,用户可以通过联动分享控件,快捷选中与照片1相关的所有文件,例如原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等,将所有的关联文件都作为待分享文件,分享给接收端设备,该方法可以避免分享过程文件的遗漏,便于将照片1的拍摄过程和制作过程都分享给接收端设备,提高了用户体验。The above display method provides users with a joint sharing solution. Users can quickly select all files related to
应理解,当用户期望取消或修改某一个文件时,还可以在图8中的(b)图或(c)图所示的界面上,点击某一个文件所在控件进行取消,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that when the user desires to cancel or modify a certain file, he can also click on the control where a certain file is located on the interface shown in Figure 8 (b) or (c) to cancel it, and will not repeat it here .
可选地,该“联动分享”控件802-1可以在用户点击一键快捷地选中和照片1关联的所有文件之后,自动消失;或者,该“联动分享”控件802-1可以在一定时长(例如5秒)内没有检测到用户对该“联动分享”控件802-1的操作之后,自动消失;又或者, 该“联动分享”控件802-1可以永久地悬浮显示在分享过程的任意一个或多个界面上,例如界面802、界面803或界面804等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "linkage sharing" control 802-1 can disappear automatically after the user clicks one button to quickly select all the files associated with the
可选地,在本申请实施例中,“联动”还可以用于指示该照片1和照片1对应的文件所在控件之间的同步关系。示例性的,以图8中的(c)图所示的界面803为例,当该界面803上的照片1的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2、编辑指导文件3……都作为“待分享的文件”,控件呈现被选中的状态。当用户点击照片1的原始文件所在的控件,那么可以联动的取消3张图片中的第1张(右下角对勾变为空白非选中态)和原始文件;当用户点击照片1的中间文件1所在的控件,那么可以联动的取消3张图片中的第2张(右下角对勾变为空白非选中态)、中间文件1和编辑指导文件1。以此类推,当所有文件在被用户手动选中过程时,也可以具有类似的联动效果,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, "linkage" may also be used to indicate a synchronization relationship between the
通过上述介绍的图5至图8的实现过程,以用户拍摄照片的过程为例,当用户拍摄的照片的过程中,手机可以根据用户拍摄的照片、以及拍摄照片过程中的一种或多种拍摄参数生成对应的“拍摄指导文件”,和/或,根据拍摄完成后用户编辑该照片的过程中的编辑参数,生成对应的“编辑指导文件”。当用户从发送端设备上向接收端设备分享照片的过程中,发送端设备上可以为用户显示与该照片相关的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等一个或多个文件,并由用户手动选择一个或多个文件作为待分享文件,发送给接收端设备,以便于接收端设备可以根据该拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等一个或多个文件包含的参数,指导自身也拍摄出相同效果的照片、或者制作出相同效果的照片,该过程实现了将该照片的拍摄过程、编辑经验的分享,满足了不同用户,提高了用户体验。Through the implementation process of Figures 5 to 8 described above, taking the process of the user taking photos as an example, when the user takes the photos, the mobile phone can use the photos taken by the user and one or more A corresponding "shooting guidance file" is generated from the shooting parameters, and/or a corresponding "editing guidance file" is generated according to the editing parameters in the process of editing the photo by the user after the shooting is completed. When the user shares a photo from the sending device to the receiving device, the sending device can display one or more original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files related to the photo for the user. files, and the user manually selects one or more files as the files to be shared, and sends them to the receiving device, so that the receiving device can follow the parameters contained in one or more files such as the shooting guide file and/or editing guide file. , instructing itself to take photos with the same effect or to make photos with the same effect. This process realizes the sharing of the photo shooting process and editing experience, satisfies different users, and improves user experience.
应理解,本申请实施例的拍摄照片的能力、分享照片的能力可以是手机等电子设备的系统能力,相应地,该系统能力可以被相机应用等多种具有拍摄功能的应用程序调用。示例性的,该分享照片的过程的实现,可以基于手机出厂时配置的相机应用,还可以支持用户下载并安装的美颜相机、美拍等其他的能够拍摄照片的任意应用调用该能力,或者,还可以应用于 应用、 应用等具有照片拍摄、视频录制等功能的任意应用调用该能力,本申请实施例对此不作限定。 It should be understood that the ability to take photos and share photos in the embodiments of the present application may be system capabilities of electronic devices such as mobile phones. Correspondingly, the system capabilities may be called by various application programs with shooting functions such as camera applications. Exemplarily, the realization of the process of sharing photos can be based on the camera application configured when the mobile phone leaves the factory, and can also support users to download and install the beauty camera, Meipai and other arbitrary applications that can take photos to call this capability, or , can also be applied to application, Any application, such as an application, that has functions such as photo shooting and video recording, invokes this capability, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
还应理解,除了上述介绍的拍摄照片并分享照片的场景之外,本申请实施例提供的拍摄场景还可以用于录制视频的场景、双景拍摄、多景拍摄、人像、录像、夜景、专业等其他不同拍摄模式或拍摄场景,本申请实施例对此不作限定。其中,每个拍摄模式都有各自的特殊性,但是拍摄过程、编辑操作过程和对应的参数可以参考前述介绍的拍摄照片的过程,所有的拍摄模式都可以生成对应的拍摄指导文件,本申请实施例对不同拍摄模式下的实现过程不作赘述。It should also be understood that, in addition to the scenes of taking and sharing photos described above, the shooting scenes provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be used for recording video scenes, dual-view shooting, multi-view shooting, portraits, videos, night scenes, professional and other different shooting modes or shooting scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Among them, each shooting mode has its own particularity, but the shooting process, editing operation process and corresponding parameters can refer to the process of taking photos described above. All shooting modes can generate corresponding shooting guidance files. This application implements For example, the implementation process in different shooting modes will not be described in detail.
以双景拍摄模式下录制视频片段的场景为例,图9是本申请实施例提供的再一例分享照片过程的图形用户界面示意图。Taking the scene of recording a video clip in the dual-view shooting mode as an example, FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a photo sharing process provided by the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,图9中的(a)图示出了手机的拍摄预览界面901,且用户切换当前的拍摄模式为双景拍摄模式,相应地,用于定位当前的拍摄模式的“黑色小三角图标”可以指向“双景拍摄”模式控件。Exemplarily, (a) in FIG. 9 shows the
可选地,在双景拍摄模式的拍摄预览界面901上,可以显示两个预览窗口:预览窗口901-1和预览窗口901-2。可选地,不同的预览窗口中的画面可以来源于不同的手机摄像头。示例性的,该预览窗口901-1中的画面可以来源于手机的后置的广角摄像头,用于拍摄远处的景色,该画面称为“后景流”画面;该预览窗口901-2中的画面可以来源于手机的前置摄像头,用于拍摄人物脸部特写,该画面称为“前景流”画面。Optionally, on the
在录制双景画面的视频片段的过程中,用户可以为不同的预览窗口中的画面设置不同的拍摄参数,例如每一个预览窗口中的画面,可以独立地基于表2或表3所列举的不同数量和/或不同种类的参数进行拍摄。In the process of recording video clips of dual-view images, the user can set different shooting parameters for the images in different preview windows. For example, the images in each preview window can be independently based on the different parameters listed in Table 2 or Table 3. Number and/or different kinds of parameters are taken.
当用户为每一个预览窗口设置不同的拍摄参数之后,执行如图9中的(a)图所示的操作,点击拍摄快门控件31,响应于用户的操作,手机可以通过不同的摄像头采集不同的视频画面,并根据该“后景流”画面和“前景流”画面录制视频片段。同样地,用户可以再次点击拍摄快门控件31,结束视频片段的录制过程,并将录制的视频片段保存到本地。After the user sets different shooting parameters for each preview window, perform the operation shown in (a) in Figure 9, click the
一种可能的实现方式中,对于存储在手机本地的任意一个具有双景画面的视频片段,手机可以根据该双景画面的视频片段包括的每一部分画面对应的拍摄参数,生成每一部分画面对应的拍摄指导文件,或整个双景画面对应的拍摄指导文件;以及,根据该双景画面的照片包括的每一部分画面对应的编辑参数,生成每一部分画面对应的编辑指导文件,或整个双景画面对应的编辑指导文件。In a possible implementation, for any video segment with a dual-view image stored locally in the mobile phone, the mobile phone can generate the corresponding shooting parameters of each part of the screen according to the shooting parameters corresponding to each part of the image included in the video segment of the dual-view image. A shooting guidance file, or a shooting guidance file corresponding to the entire double-view picture; and, according to the editing parameters corresponding to each part of the picture included in the double-view picture, generate an editing guidance file corresponding to each part of the picture, or a corresponding editing parameter for the entire double-view picture editorial guidance document.
示例性的,该双景画面的视频片段可以理解为两部分画面的组合,那么该双景画面的视频片段对应的文件可以包括:“后景流”的文件、“前景流”的文件和“前景流+后景流(全场景流)”的文件。Exemplarily, the video segment of the dual-view image can be understood as a combination of two parts of the image, then the files corresponding to the video segment of the dual-view image can include: a file of "background stream", a file of "foreground stream" and " Foreground flow + background flow (full scene flow)" file.
其中,“后景流”的文件可以包括:后景流”拍摄过程中的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种。类似地,“前景流”的文件和“前景流+后景流(全场景流)”的文件也同理,每一个文件可以包括不同种类和/或不同数量的参数,参照前述介绍的照片1的内容,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the file of "background flow" may include: one or more of original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files in the shooting process of "background flow". Similarly, "foreground flow" The same is true for the files of "foreground flow + background flow (full scene flow)". Each file can include different types and/or different numbers of parameters. Refer to the content of
用户执行如图9中的(b)图所示的操作,点击拍摄预览界面902的本地相册控件32,响应于用户的操作,手机显示如图9中的(c)图所示的界面903。该界面903显示了刚刚完成拍摄的双景画面的视频片段,以及分享、收藏、编辑、删除和更多等多个用户可执行的操作选项。The user performs an operation as shown in (b) in FIG. 9, clicks the local
用户执行如图9中的(c)图所示的操作,点击分享选项,响应于用户的操作,手机进入分享该视频片段的流程,可以显示如图9中的(d)图所示的界面904。The user performs the operation shown in (c) in Figure 9, clicks the sharing option, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone enters the process of sharing the video clip, and the interface shown in (d) in Figure 9 can be displayed 904.
示例性的,当待分享照片是双景画面的视频片段时,该界面904上可以显示该双景画面的视频片段的封面缩略图,且该视频片段的封面缩略图的右下角的选择框默认为被选中的状态,该界面904上还显示了独立存在的与该视频片段关联的后景流的封面缩略图、前景流的封面缩略图,例如该界面上以3个并列的视频片段的封面缩略图示出,且第2个封面缩略图仅包括后景流拍摄的视频画面,第3个封面缩略图仅包括前景流拍摄的视频画面。Exemplarily, when the photo to be shared is a video segment of a dual-view image, the
此外,该界面904还可以显示与待分享的该双景画面的视频片段包括的不同的流、不同的画面相关的选项,例如前景流选项、后景流选项和全场景流选项。In addition, the
可选地,该界面904上显示的每一个视频片段可以在封面缩略图的显示区域内为用户呈现动态播放的效果,供用户查看视频效果,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, each video segment displayed on the
当用户执行如图9中的(d)图所示的操作,点击“后景流”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机将进一步显示如图9中的(e)图所示的界面905,该界面905显示“后景流”画面关联的一种或多种文件,例如与“后景流”画面关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,该“后景流”画面关联的原始文件所在控件可以显示为被选中状态。When the user performs the operation shown in (d) in Figure 9 and clicks on the "background stream" option, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone will further display an
用户执行如图9中的(e)图所示的操作1-操作2,选中该“后景流”画面对应的原始文件、拍摄指导文件作为待分享的文件,通过Huawei Share的分享方式,发送给接收端设备(例如MateBook)。The user performs operation 1-
同样地,用户如果点击“前景流”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机将进一步显示“前景流”画面关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,请参照上述实现过程,此处不再赘述。Similarly, if the user clicks on the "foreground flow" option, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone will further display one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files associated with the "foreground flow" screen. There are many kinds, please refer to the above implementation process, and will not repeat them here.
当用户点击“全场景流”选项,响应于用户的操作,手机将“前景流+后景流”的双景画面照片作为一个整体的合流照片,手机将进一步显示“前景流+后景流”画面关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,请参照上述实现过程,此处不再赘述。When the user clicks the "full scene flow" option, in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone will take the dual-view photo of "foreground flow + background flow" as a whole merged photo, and the mobile phone will further display "foreground flow + background flow" For one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file, and editing guidance file associated with the screen, please refer to the above implementation process, and will not repeat them here.
应理解,以上实施例以一个手机前后两个不同的摄像头同时拍摄视频为例进行说明,该场景也可以应用于一个手机使用自身的一个摄像头和使用与该手机保持无线连接(或有线连接)的另一个具有摄像头的设备同时拍摄视频或照片的场景,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the above embodiment is described by taking two different cameras at the front and back of a mobile phone as an example to shoot video at the same time. Another scenario where a device with a camera simultaneously shoots videos or photos will not be repeated here.
通过上述方法,本申请实施例的拍摄过程和分享过程可以应用于双景拍摄模式,双景拍摄模式下拍摄到的具有双景画面视频中的每一个画面可以独立生成拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件。具体地,用户分享该双景画面的视频片段的过程中,可以选择将每一个画面对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件,或者全场景画面的视频片段对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件,分享到接收端设备,丰富了本申请的应用场景,一定程度上提高了双景画面拍摄中每一个画面的利用效率,增加了可用的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件,实现拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,提升了用户的使用体验。Through the above method, the shooting process and sharing process of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the dual-view shooting mode, and each picture in the video with dual-view pictures captured in the dual-view shooting mode can independently generate a shooting guidance file and/or edit guidance document. Specifically, during the process of sharing the video clips of the dual-view screen, the user can choose to include the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to each screen, or the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file corresponding to the video clip of the full-scene picture. The guide file is shared with the receiving end device, which enriches the application scenarios of this application, improves the utilization efficiency of each screen in the dual-view screen shooting to a certain extent, increases the available shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, and realizes shooting The sharing of process and editing process improves the user experience.
可选地,除了上述实施例介绍的双景拍摄的场景,对于其他“多景拍摄”或者“多流拍摄”的场景,可以对应多种不同的处理方式。Optionally, in addition to the scene of dual-view shooting introduced in the above embodiment, for other "multi-view shooting" or "multi-stream shooting" scenes, a variety of different processing methods may be corresponding.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例的“多景拍摄”或“多流拍摄”,可以包括在拍摄过程中就显示多个画面,例如图9中的(a)图所示的2个拍摄画面;也可以包括录制视频时,用户中途切换摄像头的操作,产生的多流拍摄的场景,换言之,手机通过不同的摄像头获取图像时,可以独立地生成不同的拍摄指导文件,该拍摄指导文件可以独立存储,后续不再赘述。It should be noted that the "multi-scene shooting" or "multi-stream shooting" in the embodiment of the present application may include displaying multiple pictures during the shooting process, such as the two shooting pictures shown in (a) of Figure 9 ; It can also include the multi-stream shooting scene generated by the operation of the user switching the camera midway when recording the video. In other words, when the mobile phone obtains images through different cameras, different shooting guidance files can be independently generated. storage, and will not be described in detail later.
示例性的,以“多流拍摄”模式下录制视频的过程为例,假设用户通过手机的一个或多个不同的摄像头录制了多流视频,该多流视频关联的文件可以包括以下一种或多种:Exemplarily, taking the video recording process in the "multi-stream shooting" mode as an example, assuming that the user has recorded a multi-stream video through one or more different cameras of the mobile phone, the files associated with the multi-stream video may include one of the following or Various:
(1)全场景流组成的完整的视频片段文件;(1) A complete video clip file composed of a full scene stream;
(2)多个画面中每一个画面对应的视频片段文件;(2) video segment files corresponding to each of the multiple pictures;
(3)每一个画面的录制视频过程中,如果发生摄像头的切换,可以以切换摄像头的时机对该画面的视频进行分段,临时保存每一个画面对应的多个视频片段文件;(3) During the video recording process of each picture, if the switching of the camera occurs, the video of the picture can be segmented at the timing of switching the camera, and a plurality of video clip files corresponding to each picture can be temporarily saved;
(4)每一个画面的录制视频过程中,如果检测到用户的多次暂停操作,可以以用户执行暂停操作的时机对该画面的视频进行分段,临时保存每一个画面对应的多个视频片段文件。(4) During the video recording process of each screen, if multiple pause operations by the user are detected, the video of the screen can be segmented at the timing when the user performs the pause operation, and multiple video clips corresponding to each screen can be temporarily saved document.
应理解,对于上述任意一种方式的视频划分,该多流视频都可以被划分为多个视频片段,且每一个视频片段可以关联一种或多种文件,例如每一个视频片段都可能包括关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种。It should be understood that for video division in any of the above methods, the multi-stream video can be divided into multiple video segments, and each video segment can be associated with one or more files, for example, each video segment may include associated One or more of original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guide files and editing guide files.
可选地,全场景流组成的完整的视频片段文件被划分为多个视频片段,每一个视频片段可以进行在线预览,用户可以选中满意的视频片段并进行保存;用户不满意的视频片段可以进行手动删除,或者每一个视频片段都可以作为临时文件,当用户保存选中的视频片段时,该没有被选中的视频片段可以被删除。Optionally, the complete video clip file composed of the whole scene stream is divided into multiple video clips, each video clip can be previewed online, and the user can select a satisfactory video clip and save it; the unsatisfactory video clip can be saved Manual deletion, or each video clip can be used as a temporary file, when the user saves the selected video clip, the unselected video clip can be deleted.
应理解,被保存的视频片段可以生成对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件,并保存对应的文件。It should be understood that a corresponding shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file may be generated for the saved video segment, and the corresponding file may be saved.
可选地,对于多流视频,用户还可以进行多次保存,每次保存可以保留不同的视频片段;多流视频中的某一个视频片段也可以在不同的场景下被保存多次,请参照前述介绍的照片1被保存为中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……的实现过程,为了简便,此处不再赘述。Optionally, for multi-stream videos, users can also save multiple times, and each save can save different video clips; a certain video clip in multi-stream videos can also be saved multiple times in different scenarios, please refer to For the sake of brevity, the implementation process of saving
可选地,如果用户在预览多流视频的多个视频片段时,如果特别喜欢某一路流或某一个画面,该路视频被选择了多次,那么该路流的多个视频片段可以直接进行拼接,变成一路流的视频片段,并进行保存,并生成对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件,本申请实施例对多流视频拍摄场景中的实现方式不作限定。Optionally, if the user particularly likes a certain stream or a certain picture when previewing multiple video clips of a multi-stream video, and the video has been selected multiple times, then the multiple video clips of the stream can be directly displayed. Splicing, becoming a stream of video clips, saving them, and generating corresponding shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation in the multi-stream video shooting scene.
应理解,以上实施例以一个手机前后两个不同的摄像头同时拍摄视频为例进行说明,该场景也可以应用于一个手机使用自身的一个摄像头和使用与该手机保持无线连接(或有线连接)的另一个具有摄像头的设备同时拍摄视频或照片的场景,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the above embodiment takes two different cameras at the front and back of a mobile phone as an example to shoot video at the same time. Another scenario where a device with a camera simultaneously shoots videos or photos will not be repeated here.
上述不同的实现方式,可以使得拍摄过程、分享拍摄的过程更加灵活,让用户结合自己的拍摄需求,手动选择并分享一个或多个与拍摄、编辑相关的文件,为用户提供了更加多样、更加便捷的分享方式。The above different implementation methods can make the process of shooting and sharing more flexible, allowing users to manually select and share one or more files related to shooting and editing according to their own shooting needs, providing users with more diverse and more Easy way to share.
通过上述图6至图9的过程,介绍了用户从发送端设备上,选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件,以及与该多媒体文件相关的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种文件,并分享给接收端设备,接收端设备可以接收发送端设备分享的文件。Through the above-mentioned process of Fig. 6 to Fig. 9, it is introduced that the user selects multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared from the sending device, as well as the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and related multimedia files. Edit one or more files in the guidance file and share them with the receiving device, and the receiving device can receive the files shared by the sending device.
图10是本申请实施例提供的一例接收端设备接收文件的图形用户界面示意图。示例性的,平板显示解锁后的主界面,该主界面上可以显示时钟、日历、图库、备忘录、相机、音乐和设置等一个或多个应用程序。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a receiving device receiving a file provided by an embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the tablet displays an unlocked main interface, on which one or more applications such as clock, calendar, gallery, memo, camera, music and settings can be displayed.
以图6中手机向平板(MateBook)分享照片1的原始文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑 指导文件为例,当平板检测到手机分享的文件之后,可以在主界面上自动弹出提示窗口1001-1,显示如图10中的(a)图所示的界面1001。Take the original file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file of
可选地,该提示窗口1001-1中可以显示检测到的文件名称,以及“接收”控件、“取消”控件等,该提示窗口1001-1中还可以显示提示信息:是否接收来自手机的文件?。Optionally, the detected file name can be displayed in the prompt window 1001-1, as well as a "receive" control, a "cancel" control, etc., and a prompt message can also be displayed in the prompt window 1001-1: whether to receive the file from the mobile phone ? .
示例性的,如图10中的(a)图所示,平板检测到的手机发送的一种或多种文件名称之后显示:原始文件(照片1)、拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)和编辑指导文件(照片1-E)。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure 10 (a), one or more file names sent by the mobile phone detected by the tablet are displayed after: original file (photo 1), shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) and Editorial guidance document (Photo 1-E).
可选地,该提示窗口1001-1中显示的原始文件(照片1)、拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)和编辑指导文件(照片1-E)为被选中状态。用户执行如图10中的(a)图所示的操作,点击“接收”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板接收并解析一种或多种文件,得到该照片1的原始文件(照片1)、拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)和编辑指导文件(照片1-E)。Optionally, the original file (photo 1), shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) and editing guidance file (photo 1-E) displayed in the prompt window 1001-1 are selected. The user performs the operation shown in (a) in Figure 10, clicks the "receive" control, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet receives and parses one or more files to obtain the original file of the photo 1 (photo 1) , Shooting Guidance Document (Photo 1-D) and Editing Guidance Document (Photo 1-E).
应理解,平板可以解析并获取该照片1的原始文件、拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)和编辑指导文件(照片1-E)包含的参数信息,且平板可以根据文件类型、文件名称、参数类型等确定接收的文件所具有的功能。It should be understood that the tablet can analyze and obtain the parameter information contained in the original file of the
示例性的,平板确定接收的文件所具有的功能之后,可以进一步显示如图10中的(b)图所示的界面1002,该界面1002上包括提示窗口1002-1,用于提示用户:是否查看并使用接收的文件?Exemplarily, after the tablet determines the functions of the received file, it may further display an
可选地,用户可以执行如图10中的(b)图所示的操作1-操作2,点击该原始文件(照片1)的选项,以及“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以显示如图10中的(c)图所示的该照片1的详情界面1003,使得用户可以查看该照片1的画面内容。可选地,该界面1003上还可以显示关闭控件、“返回”控件、“编辑”控件等,用户可以点击关闭控件,平板可以显示如图10中的(d)图所示的界面1004和提示窗口1004-1(可以同提示窗口1002-1),本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the user can perform operation 1-
可选地,用户可以执行如图10中的(d)图所示的操作1-操作2,点击该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)的选项,以及“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以关联本地安装的具有拍摄功能的一个或多个应用。Optionally, the user can perform operation 1-
示例性的,用户点击如图10中的(d)图所示的“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以直接直接启动相机应用,并跳转显示如图10中的(f)图所示的相机应用的拍摄预览界面1006,使得用户可以基于接收的该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)包括的一种或多种拍摄参数拍摄其他画面。Exemplarily, the user clicks the "OK" control as shown in (d) in Figure 10, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can directly start the camera application, and jump to display (f) in Figure 10 The
假设该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)中包括的焦距不同于当前平板的相机应用默认的拍摄模式下焦距,那么当用户执行如图10中的(d)图所示的操作2之后,平板自动启动相机应用,并自动调整当前的拍摄焦距为拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)中包括的焦距,如图10中的(f)图所示,即实现以手机分享的拍摄过程指导当前的拍摄,以拍摄出用户期望效果的照片。Assuming that the focal length included in the shooting guidance file (photo 1-D) is different from the focal length in the default shooting mode of the current tablet camera application, then after the user performs
或者,当平板上具有拍摄功能的应用为多个时,用户点击如图10中的(d)图所示的“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以显示图10中的(e)图所示的界面1005,该接界面1005上的提示窗口1005-1中显示了提示信息:通过以下应用打开拍摄指导 文件(照片1-D)?并为用户显示了平板上具有拍摄功能的美拍、微信、相机等多个应用,本申请实施例对可以关联的多个应用不作限定。用户可以在该提示窗口1005-1中选择所需要的应用,例如点击相机应用的图标,响应于用户的操作,平板跳转显示如图10中的(f)图所示的相机应用的拍摄预览界面1006,使得用户可以基于接收的该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)包括的一种或多种拍摄参数拍摄其他画面。Alternatively, when there are multiple applications with the shooting function on the tablet, the user clicks the "OK" control as shown in (d) in Figure 10, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can display (e) in Figure 10 In the
可选地,用户如果执行如图10中的(g)图所示的操作1-操作2,点击界面1007的提示窗口1007-1中的该编辑指导文件(照片1-E)的选项,以及“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以启动图库应用,并跳转显示如图10中的(h)图所示的图库应用的主界面1008,该界面1008上显示了平板本地保存的多张照片,用户可以选择待处理的照片(包括“跨步的人”的照片)。Optionally, if the user performs operation 1-
示例性的,用户执行如图10中的(h)图所示的操作,选中该待处理的目标照片(包括“跨步的人”的照片),响应于用户的选中操作,平板可以自动地基于接收的该编辑指导文件(照片1-E)包括的一种或多种编辑参数对待处理的目标照片(包括“跨步的人”的照片)进行编辑处理,并为用户显示如图10中的(i)图所示的该照片(包括“跨步的人”的照片)经过自动编辑处理之后的详情界面1009。Exemplarily, the user performs the operation shown in (h) in Figure 10, selects the target photo to be processed (including the photo of "the person who is stepping"), and in response to the user's selection operation, the tablet can automatically Based on one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file (photo 1-E) received, the target photo to be processed (including the photo of "the person stepping") is edited and processed, and displayed for the user as shown in Figure 10 The details interface 1009 shown in (i) after the photo (including the photo of "the stepping person") is automatically edited.
应理解,该界面1009上的照片(包括“跨步的人”的照片)可以基于该编辑指导文件(照片1-E)包括的一种或多种编辑参数,自动进行裁剪、添加滤镜等表4中列举的多项编辑处理,并为用户呈现最终处理后的显示效果。It should be understood that the photos on the interface 1009 (including photos of "people who are stepping") can automatically crop, add filters, etc. based on one or more editing parameters included in the editing guidance file (photo 1-E) Multiple editing processes listed in Table 4, and present the final processed display effect for the user.
可选地,平板接收的一个或多个模板能够支持用户对其中包含的参数进行修改。示例性的,拍摄指导文件中的一种或多种拍摄参数,和/或编辑指导文件中的一种或多种编辑参数能够在平板上被用户手动修改。Optionally, one or more templates received by the tablet can support the user to modify the parameters contained therein. Exemplarily, one or more shooting parameters in the shooting guidance file, and/or one or more editing parameters in the editing guidance file can be manually modified by the user on the tablet.
示例性的,如图10中的(j)图所示,在界面1010上,用户可以长按“拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)”选项,可以显示操作窗口,该操作窗口可以包括查看相关参数、删除、编辑、更多等选项,支持用户根据自己的需求进行操作。Exemplarily, as shown in (j) in FIG. 10, on the
当用户点击“查看相关参数”选项,响应于用户的操作,平板可以显示如图10中的(k)图所示的界面1011,在界面1011上,为用户显示了该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)中包括的一种或多种参数,支持用户点击任意一种参数进行修改,删除等操作,本申请实施例对此不作限定。When the user clicks on the "View Related Parameters" option, in response to the user's operation, the tablet can display an
综上所述,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法,能够在拍摄照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄指导文件;以及,在对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行编辑处理的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑指导文件。在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,可以为用户显示该多媒体文件关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,支持用户手动选择期望分享的一种或多种文件。To sum up, the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos; In the process of editing multimedia files such as multimedia files, an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters. In the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
根据不同的分享需求,用户手动选择将照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,发送给接收端设备,在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的同时,实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑 指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。According to different sharing requirements, the user manually chooses to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device. , video and other multimedia files at the same time, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process is realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guidance file The included shooting parameters guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
此外,在用户手动选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件过程中,在分享界面上,电子设备可以基于照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件,叠加拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等多种可能的文件,为用户生成静态或动态的在线预览画面,有助于用户查看不同文件对应的显示效果,便于用户选择待分享的文件,分享的目的更加精确。In addition, when the user manually selects the original files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, the corresponding shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files, on the sharing interface, the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared. The purpose of sharing is more precise.
其次,在用户手动选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件过程中,在分享界面上,还可以为用户提供联动分享方法,用户可以通过联动分享控件,快捷选中与待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件相关的所有文件,例如原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等,并将所有的关联文件都作为待分享文件,分享给接收端设备,该方法可以避免分享过程的遗漏,提高了用户体验。Secondly, when the user manually selects the original file of multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, the corresponding shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file, on the sharing interface, a linkage sharing method can also be provided for the user. Linkage sharing control, quickly select all files related to multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, such as original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files and editing guidance files, etc., and all associated files as to be shared The file is shared with the receiving end device. This method can avoid omissions in the sharing process and improve user experience.
最后,对于多景拍摄的场景,本申请实施例能够实现多景拍摄的视频等在线预览和保存,一次拍摄,能够针对多景中的每一个画面生成多个视频片段以及每一个视频片段关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等一个或多个,丰富了拍摄体验,也给用户提供了极大的便利。Finally, for the scene of multi-scene shooting, the embodiment of the present application can realize the online preview and storage of the video of multi-scene shooting, and can generate multiple video clips and each video clip associated with each scene in one shot. One or more of the original file, the intermediate file, the final file, the shooting guidance file, and the editing guidance file enrich the shooting experience and provide users with great convenience.
上述实施例结合图3至图10,从用户交互层面介绍了拍摄多媒体文件的过程、以及分享多媒体文件的过程,下面将结合图11,从软件实现策略层面,介绍本申请实施例提供的方法实现流程。The above-mentioned embodiment introduces the process of shooting multimedia files and the process of sharing multimedia files from the user interaction level in combination with FIG. 3 to FIG. 10 . The method implementation provided by the embodiment of the present application will be introduced below from the software implementation strategy level in conjunction with FIG. 11 process.
应理解,该方法可以在如图1、图2所示的具有显示屏、一个或多个摄像头等结构的不同的电子设备中实现,例如手机和平板等不同的两个电子设备之间实现多媒体文件的分享。It should be understood that this method can be implemented in different electronic devices with structures such as a display screen and one or more cameras as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2, such as implementing multimedia between two different electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablets. file sharing.
图11是本申请实施例提供的一例分享多媒体文件的方法的示意性流程图。该方法1100可以分为两个阶段,包括:FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sharing multimedia files provided by an embodiment of the present application. The
第一阶段:发送端设备(例如手机)阶段The first stage: the sending end device (such as mobile phone) stage
应理解,第一阶段可以由发送端设备执行,所述发送端设备存储有一个或多个模板,具体可以包括以下步骤:It should be understood that the first stage may be performed by the sender device, where one or more templates are stored in the sender device, and may specifically include the following steps:
1101,检测到用于分享多媒体文件的第一操作,响应于所述第一操作,确定所述多媒体文件关联的n个模板,并显示所述多媒体文件的第一分享界面,所述第一分享界面上包括所述多媒体文件、所述n个模板、以及一种或多种分享方式。1101. Detecting a first operation for sharing a multimedia file, in response to the first operation, determining n templates associated with the multimedia file, and displaying a first sharing interface of the multimedia file, the first sharing The interface includes the multimedia files, the n templates, and one or more sharing methods.
其中,所述多媒体文件是照片、动图或视频片段中的任意一种,所述n个模板中的每一个模板包括使所述多媒体文件具有不同显示效果的一种或多种参数,n为大于或等于1的整数。Wherein, the multimedia file is any one of photos, animations or video clips, each of the n templates includes one or more parameters that make the multimedia file have different display effects, and n is An integer greater than or equal to 1.
可选地,“第一操作”可以是用户在该多媒体文件的详情界面上,点击“分享”选项或控件的操作。Optionally, the "first operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks the option or control of "Share" on the details interface of the multimedia file.
可选地,本申请实施例的“多媒体文件”可以是用户通过电子设备的相机应用等拍摄得到的照片、动图或视频片段等,也可以是用户从网络、服务器、社交平台等下载的照片、动图或视频片段等,或者接收的由其他设备发送并保存在电子设备的本地的 照片、动图或视频片段等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "multimedia file" in the embodiment of the present application may be photos, animations or video clips taken by the user through the camera application of the electronic device, etc., or it may be a photo downloaded by the user from the network, server, social platform, etc. , moving pictures or video clips, etc., or received photos, moving pictures or video clips sent by other devices and stored locally on the electronic device, this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
示例性的,以用户下载的一张照片为例,当用户下载该照片并保存到电子设备的本地图库时,电子设备可以检测该照片并获取该照片对应的拍摄参数,例如该照片的亮度等级、滤镜色彩等拍摄参数,或者获取该照片被编辑处理的编辑参数,此处不再一一赘述。Exemplarily, taking a photo downloaded by the user as an example, when the user downloads the photo and saves it to the local gallery of the electronic device, the electronic device can detect the photo and obtain shooting parameters corresponding to the photo, such as the brightness level of the photo , filter color and other shooting parameters, or obtain the editing parameters of the photo being edited and processed, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,照片、动图或视频片段等任意一个多媒体文件,对应不同的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数时,可以呈现出不同的显示效果。It should be understood that any multimedia file such as a photo, a moving picture, or a video clip may present different display effects when corresponding to different shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,所述发送端设备存储有多个多媒体文件,以及每一个多媒体文件关联的一个或多个模板。It should be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the sending end device stores multiple multimedia files and one or more templates associated with each multimedia file.
示例性的,某多媒体文件关联n个模板,n个模板可以包括该多媒体文件关联的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件。Exemplarily, a certain multimedia file is associated with n templates, and the n templates may include shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files associated with the multimedia file.
示例性的,多媒体文件可以是一张照片,那么该照片关联的一个或多个模板,可以包括:拍摄指导文件、一个或多个编辑指导文件等。Exemplarily, the multimedia file may be a photo, and one or more templates associated with the photo may include: a shooting guide file, one or more editing guide files, and the like.
或者,多媒体文件可以是一个视频片段,那么该视频片段关联的一个或多个模板,可以包括:一个或多个拍摄指导文件、一个或多个编辑指导文件等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the multimedia file may be a video segment, and one or more templates associated with the video segment may include: one or more shooting guidance files, one or more editing guidance files, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application .
可选地,所述一个或多个模板中可以包括所述发送端设备根据关联的所述多媒体文件的一种或多种拍摄参数生成的拍摄模板,即前述实施例所说的“拍摄指导文件”。Optionally, the one or more templates may include a shooting template generated by the sending device according to one or more shooting parameters of the associated multimedia file, that is, the "shooting guidance file" mentioned in the foregoing embodiment ".
一种可能的实现方式中,每一个多媒体文件可以通过不同的方式和一个或多个模板进行关联或绑定。In a possible implementation manner, each multimedia file may be associated or bound with one or more templates in different ways.
可选地,每一个多媒体文件可以通过文件名和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Optionally, each multimedia file can be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file through the file name.
或者,通过为每一个多媒体文件可以生成唯一的哈希值和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定。Alternatively, a unique hash value may be generated for each multimedia file to be associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file.
又或者,通过为每一个多媒体文件预设的关键值和该多媒体文件的“拍摄指导文件”和/或“编辑指导文件”进行关联或绑定,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Alternatively, the key value preset for each multimedia file is associated or bound with the "shooting guidance file" and/or "editing guidance file" of the multimedia file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
具体地,本申请实施例所涉及的“拍摄参数”可以包括前述表2或表3中列举的焦距、对焦模式、分辨率、摄像头、地理位置信息、美颜参数、滤镜色彩、闪光灯效果、水平仪效果、曝光度、感光度中的一种或多种参数。Specifically, the "shooting parameters" involved in the embodiment of the present application may include the focal length, focus mode, resolution, camera, geographic location information, beauty parameters, filter color, flash effect, One or more parameters in Level Meter Effect, Exposure, and Sensitivity.
可选地,所述一个或多个模板中还可以包括所述发送端设备根据关联的所述多媒体文件的一种或多种编辑参数生成的编辑模板,即前述实施例所说的“编辑指导文件”。Optionally, the one or more templates may also include an editing template generated by the sending device according to one or more editing parameters of the associated multimedia file, that is, the "editing guidance" mentioned in the foregoing embodiments document".
具体地,本申请实施例所涉及的“编辑参数”可以包括用户对所述多媒体文件执行编辑处理的操作参数,所述编辑处理包括前述表4或表5中列举的裁剪、调整滤镜色彩、调整美颜参数、调整亮度等级、标注处理、涂鸦处理、马赛克处理、水印处理中的一种或多种。Specifically, the "editing parameters" involved in the embodiment of the present application may include operating parameters for the user to perform editing processing on the multimedia file, and the editing processing includes cropping, adjusting filter color, Adjust one or more of beauty parameters, adjust brightness levels, label processing, graffiti processing, mosaic processing, and watermark processing.
可选地,所述一个或多个模板中还可以包括预设模板。其中,预设模板不限于是拍摄指导文件或者编辑指导文件。Optionally, the one or more templates may also include a preset template. Wherein, the preset template is not limited to a shooting guidance file or an editing guidance file.
示例性的,不同的电子设备具有不同的硬件,对应不同的硬件参数、硬件能力,可能在出厂时被配置了适合于该电子设备摄像头等硬件的拍摄参数,用户不需要额外 的设置就可以拍摄得到拍摄效果较好的照片,该预设的拍摄参数可以对应预设的拍摄指导文件。如果用户期望将该预设的拍摄指导文件共享给平板等其他电子设备,也可以通过本申请实施例的过程,将手机上拍摄的任意一张照片,以及该预设的拍摄指导文件分享给平板,从而使得平板也可以拍摄具有相同显示效果的照片,本申请实施例对此不作限定。同样地,也可以为手机配置预设的编辑指导文件,此处不再赘述。Exemplarily, different electronic devices have different hardware, corresponding to different hardware parameters and hardware capabilities, and may be configured with shooting parameters suitable for hardware such as the camera of the electronic device at the factory, and the user can shoot without additional settings To obtain a photo with a better shooting effect, the preset shooting parameters may correspond to the preset shooting guidance file. If the user wishes to share the preset shooting guidance file with other electronic devices such as a tablet, he can also share any photo taken on the mobile phone and the preset shooting guidance file with the tablet through the process of the embodiment of the present application. , so that the tablet can also take photos with the same display effect, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Similarly, a preset editing guide file can also be configured for the mobile phone, which will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实现方式中,当一个多媒体文件的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件生成之后,用户触发分享该多媒体文件的操作时,只要用户选择了期望分享的待分享的多媒体文件,相应地,与该待分享多媒体文件相关的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等一个或多个文件都可以显示给用户,供用户手动选择一个或多个文件,实现按需分享。In a possible implementation, when the user triggers the operation of sharing the multimedia file after the shooting guidance file and/or editing guidance file of a multimedia file is generated, as long as the user selects the desired multimedia file to be shared, correspondingly , one or more files such as shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files related to the multimedia file to be shared can be displayed to the user for the user to manually select one or more files to realize on-demand sharing.
示例性的,所述第一分享界面上可以显示与多媒体文件相关的一种或多种模板名称控件,例如以文件列表的形式显示与多媒体文件相关的原始文件(封面缩略图等)、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, one or more template name controls related to multimedia files may be displayed on the first sharing interface, for example, original files (cover thumbnails, etc.), intermediate files related to multimedia files are displayed in the form of a file list , final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
此外,所述第一分享界面上还可以显示Huawei Share、微信应用分享、蓝牙、信息、电子邮件等一种或多种分享方式对应的选项,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In addition, the first sharing interface may also display options corresponding to one or more sharing methods such as Huawei Share, WeChat application sharing, Bluetooth, message, email, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
另一种可能的显示方式中,该多媒体文件可以经过用户的多次编辑处理,该第一分享界面可以如图7中的(b)图所示的界面702所示,显示所有与多媒体文件(照片1)相关的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3……最终文件、拍摄指导文件、编辑指导文件1、编辑指导文件2和编辑指导文件3等多种文件。In another possible display mode, the multimedia file can be edited multiple times by the user, and the first sharing interface can be shown in the
1102,在所述第一分享界面上,检测到用于选择待分享模板的第二操作,响应于所述第二操作,确定所述待分享模板,所述待分享模板是所述n个模板中的一个或多个。1102. On the first sharing interface, detect a second operation for selecting a template to be shared, and determine the template to be shared in response to the second operation, where the template to be shared is the n templates one or more of the .
可选地,这里“第二操作”可以包括用户点击或选中一个或多个文件的操作,例如用户依次选中了该多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件,那么该第二操作可以包括四次点击操作,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the "second operation" here may include an operation in which the user clicks or selects one or more files. The second operation may include four click operations, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
1103,检测到用于选择分享方式的第三操作,响应于所述第三操作,从所述一种或多种分享方式中,确定选择的分享方式,且显示所述多媒体文件的第二分享界面,所述第二分享界面上显示一个或多个电子设备的标识。1103. A third operation for selecting a sharing method is detected, and in response to the third operation, determine the selected sharing method from the one or more sharing methods, and display the second sharing method of the multimedia file interface, where the second sharing interface displays the identifications of one or more electronic devices.
可选地,所述目标分享方式包括华为分享方式、WLAN直连通道的分享方式、蓝牙分享方式、移动数据分享方式或多种社交软件分享方式中的任意一种。Optionally, the target sharing method includes Huawei sharing method, WLAN direct channel sharing method, Bluetooth sharing method, mobile data sharing method or any one of multiple social software sharing methods.
可选地,“第三操作”可以是用户点击选择分享方式所在选项或控件的操作。Optionally, the "third operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks on the option or control where the sharing method is selected.
1104,在所述第二分享界面上,检测到用于确定接收端设备的第四操作,响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板。1104. On the second sharing interface, detect a fourth operation for determining the receiving end device, and in response to the fourth operation, send the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method .
可选地,“第四操作”可以是用户点击选择目标电子设备的名称或图标所在显示区域的操作。Optionally, the "fourth operation" may be an operation in which the user clicks to select the display area where the name or icon of the target electronic device is located.
应理解,在分享多媒体文件的过程中,包括多个可能的分享界面,每个分享界面上显示的内容有所差别。It should be understood that the process of sharing multimedia files includes multiple possible sharing interfaces, and the content displayed on each sharing interface is different.
示例性的,第一分享界面可以是如图6中的(b)图所示的界面602,或者图7中 的(b)图所示的界面702,或者图8中的(b)图所示的界面802;第二分享界面可以是如图6中的(c)图所示的界面603,或者图7中的(c)图所示的界面703,或者图8中的(c)图所示的界面803,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the first sharing interface may be the
一种可能的实现方式中,当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上包括所述多媒体文件,且所述多媒体文件处于被选中状态时,发送端设备可以响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板和所述多媒体文件。In a possible implementation manner, when the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, and the multimedia file is in a selected state, the sending end device may respond to the The fourth operation is to send the template to be shared and the multimedia file to the receiver device through the sharing method.
示例性的,以多媒体文件是照片为例,用户触发分享该照片,那么在照片分享界面上,该照片的缩略图的右下角的选择框可以默认为被选中的状态,且该照片对应的文件列表中的“原始文件”也默认为被选中的状态,可以简化用户的操作,用户可以在接收端设备上也查看该照片的显示效果,提高了用户体验。Exemplarily, taking a multimedia file as a photo as an example, if the user triggers to share the photo, then on the photo sharing interface, the selection box in the lower right corner of the thumbnail of the photo can be selected by default, and the file corresponding to the photo The "original file" in the list is also selected by default, which can simplify the user's operation, and the user can also check the display effect of the photo on the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
一种可能的实现方式中,当所述n个模板中包括所述多媒体文件关联的编辑模板时,发送端设备可以在所述第一分享界面和/或所述第二分享界面上,显示具有第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件,所述第一显示效果对应于所述编辑模板。In a possible implementation manner, when the n templates include an editing template associated with the multimedia file, the sending device may display on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface a template with The multimedia file of the first display effect, the first display effect corresponds to the editing template.
此外,在所述第一分享界面上或所述第二分享界面上,发送端设备检测到用于选择具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件的第五操作,响应于所述第五操作,具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件变为被选中状态;以及,响应于所述第四操作,通过所述分享方式,向所述接收端设备发送所述待分享模板、具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件。In addition, on the first sharing interface or the second sharing interface, the sending end device detects a fifth operation for selecting the multimedia file with the first display effect, and responds to the fifth Operation, the multimedia file with the first display effect becomes selected; and, in response to the fourth operation, send the template to be shared to the receiving end device through the sharing method, with The multimedia file of the first display effect.
示例性的,如图7中的(b)图所示,以多媒体文件是照片为例,用户触发分享该照片,那么在照片分享界面702上,可以以缩略图的形式显示该照片关联的原始文件、中间文件,且该照片1关联的原始文件、中间文件可以具有不同显示效果,并列显示了3张照片不同的静态预览效果,以供用户预览不同的显示效果。Exemplarily, as shown in (b) in FIG. 7, taking a multimedia file as a photo as an example, and the user triggers to share the photo, then on the
应理解,如果对该照片还执行了更多次数的编辑操作,用户还可以左右滑动以查看更多预览图片以及显示效果。It should be understood that if more editing operations are performed on the photo, the user can also swipe left and right to view more preview pictures and display effects.
还应理解,一张照片经过多次编辑处理后,在照片分享界面上显示了多种显示效果,任意一种不同显示效果的照片都可以被用户选中且发送到接收端设备。It should also be understood that after a photo has been edited multiple times, multiple display effects are displayed on the photo sharing interface, and any photo with different display effects can be selected by the user and sent to the receiving device.
另一种可能的显示方式中,当所述n个模板中包括所述多媒体文件关联的第一编辑模板和第二编辑模板时,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,还包括所述多媒体文件、具有第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件。其中,所述第一显示效果对应于所述第一编辑模板,所述第二显示效果对应于所述第二编辑模板。In another possible display manner, when the n templates include the first editing template and the second editing template associated with the multimedia file, on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing The interface further includes the multimedia file, the multimedia file with the first display effect, and the multimedia file with the second display effect. Wherein, the first display effect corresponds to the first editing template, and the second display effect corresponds to the second editing template.
又一种可能的显示方式中,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,还包括所述多媒体文件、以动态播放方式显示的具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有所述第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件。In yet another possible display manner, on the first sharing interface and/or on the second sharing interface, the multimedia file and all the multimedia files displayed in a dynamic playing manner and having the first display effect are further included. The multimedia file and the multimedia file with the second display effect.
示例性的,如图7中的(b)图所示,以多媒体文件是照片为例,用户触发分享该照片,那么在照片分享界面702上,并列显示的3张照片中,第1张照片可以为该照片的原始文件呈现的拍摄效果,第2张呈现动态预览效果,在第2张照片中动态播放该照片经过多次编辑处理后呈现的显示效果,例如中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件 3….以t秒为周期进行切换显示,第3张为照片1的最终文件呈现的显示效果。该方式以动态预览结合静态预览的方式,以供用户呈现不同的显示效果,便于用户选择期望分享的照片。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure (b) of Figure 7, taking a multimedia file as a photo as an example, and the user triggers to share the photo, then on the
再一种可能的显示方式中,在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面上,以动态播放方式显示所述多媒体文件、具有所述第一显示效果的所述多媒体文件和具有所述第二显示效果的所述多媒体文件。In yet another possible display manner, on the first sharing interface and/or on the second sharing interface, the multimedia file and the multimedia file with the first display effect are displayed in a dynamic playing manner and the multimedia file with the second display effect.
示例性的,如图7中的(b)图所示,以多媒体文件是照片为例,用户触发分享该照片,那么在照片分享界面702上,并列显示的3张照片中,第1张照片中一直动态播放该照片经过多次编辑处理后呈现的显示效果,例如初始拍摄的原始文件、中间文件1、中间文件2、中间文件3….以t(例如2秒)为周期进行切换显示。该方式以动态播放的预览方式,以供用户呈现生动的显示效果,便于用户对比不同的显示效果,从而选择期望分享的照片,提高了用户体验。Exemplarily, as shown in Figure (b) of Figure 7, taking a multimedia file as a photo as an example, and the user triggers to share the photo, then on the
一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一多媒体文件的分享界面上还包括一个控件,所述发送端设备可以在所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面,检测到作用于所述控件的第六操作,响应于所述第六操作,所述n个模板中每一个模板都显示为被选中状态;以及,In a possible implementation manner, the sharing interface of the first multimedia file further includes a control, and the sending device can detect on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface Up to a sixth operation acting on the control, in response to the sixth operation, each of the n templates is displayed as being selected; and,
当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面包括所述多媒体文件时,响应于所述第六操作,所述多媒体文件也显示为被选中状态;或者,When the multimedia file is included on the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia file is also displayed as being selected; or,
当所述第一分享界面上和/或所述第二分享界面包括具有不同显示效果的所述多媒体文件时,响应于所述第六操作,具有不同显示效果的所述多媒体文件都显示为被选中状态。When the first sharing interface and/or the second sharing interface include the multimedia files with different display effects, in response to the sixth operation, the multimedia files with different display effects are all displayed as being displayed Checked state.
示例性的,该“一个控件”可以是如图8中的(b)图所示的“联动分享”控件802-1,该“联动分享”控件802-1可以用于一键快捷地选中和待分享的该照片关联的所有文件。Exemplarily, the "one control" may be the "Linked Share" control 802-1 shown in (b) of Figure 8, and the "Linked Share" control 802-1 can be used to quickly select and All files associated with the photo to be shared.
当用户期望取消或修改某一个文件时,还可以点击某一个文件所在控件进行取消,此处不再赘述。When the user desires to cancel or modify a certain file, he can also click on the control where a certain file is located to cancel, which will not be repeated here.
上述“联动分享”控件的显示方式,为用户提供了联动分享的方案,用户可以通过联动分享控件,快捷选中与待分享的第一多媒体文件相关的所有文件,例如原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件等,将所有的关联文件都作为待分享文件,分享给接收端设备,该方法可以避免分享过程文件的遗漏,便于将第一多媒体文件的拍摄过程和制作过程都分享给接收端设备,提高了用户体验。The display mode of the above-mentioned "linkage sharing" control provides users with a link sharing solution. The user can quickly select all files related to the first multimedia file to be shared through the link share control, such as original files, intermediate files, For the final file, shooting guide file and editing guide file, all associated files are used as files to be shared and shared with the receiving end device. This method can avoid the omission of sharing process files, and facilitate the shooting process of the first multimedia file. Both the process and the production process are shared with the receiving device, which improves the user experience.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例所提供的方法的实现过程可以依赖于发送端设备能够记录拍摄过程和/或编辑过程,即获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力。It should be noted that the implementation process of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may depend on the ability of the sending device to record the shooting process and/or editing process, that is, the ability to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters.
可选地,本申请实施例的获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力可以是电子设备的系统能力,相应地,该系统能力可以被相机应用等多种具有拍摄能力的应用程序调用。该方式不需要用户额外的操作去开启该拍摄指导的功能,从而可以简化用户的操作。Optionally, the capability of acquiring related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters in this embodiment of the present application may be a system capability of the electronic device. Correspondingly, the system capability may be invoked by various application programs with shooting capabilities such as camera applications. This method does not require additional operations by the user to enable the shooting guidance function, thereby simplifying the user's operations.
示例性的,该获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力可以基于发送端设备出厂时配置的相机应用,或者,还可以基于用户下载并安装的美颜相机、美拍等其他的能够拍摄照片的任意应用,又或者,还可以应用于例如 应用、 应用等具有 照片拍摄、视频录制等功能的任意应用,都可以调用该发送端设备获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力,本申请实施例对此不作限定。 Exemplarily, the ability to obtain relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters can be based on the camera application configured on the sending end device when it leaves the factory, or can also be based on the user's downloaded and installed beauty camera, Meipai, etc. Any application of photos, or alternatively, applications such as application, Any application with functions such as photo shooting and video recording, such as an application, can call the ability of the sending device to obtain related shooting parameters and/or editing parameters, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,本申请实施例的“获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力”可以被配置在相机应用、图库应用等相关的应用中。Optionally, the "capability of obtaining relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters" in the embodiment of the present application may be configured in related applications such as a camera application and a gallery application.
一种可能的方式中,用户可以在需要使用发送端设备的“获取相关的拍摄参数和/或编辑参数的能力”时,通过相机应用、图库应用等独立地开启或关闭该功能;或者,开发人员在开发相机应用的拍摄指导功能的过程中,可以配置该拍摄指导的功能默认为开启的状态。In a possible way, when users need to use the "capability of obtaining relevant shooting parameters and/or editing parameters" of the sending device, they can independently enable or disable this function through the camera application, gallery application, etc.; or, develop In the process of developing the shooting guidance function of the camera application, personnel can configure the shooting guidance function to be enabled by default.
此外,当用户不需要使用该拍摄指导的功能时,本申请实施例还可以支持用户通过相机应用的设置控件关闭该预设功能;或者,通过图库应用的某个菜单或控件关闭该预设功能;又或者,通过系统级的设置应用相关的菜单关闭该预设功能,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In addition, when the user does not need to use the shooting guidance function, the embodiment of the present application can also support the user to turn off the preset function through the setting control of the camera application; or turn off the preset function through a certain menu or control of the gallery application ; Or, turn off the default function through the menu related to the system-level setting application, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
第二阶段:接收端设备(例如平板)的使用阶段The second stage: the use stage of the receiving end device (such as a tablet)
1105,检测到用户允许接收所述m个模板的第一操作,响应于所述第一操作,接收并获取所述m个模板,并在所述提示窗口中显示所述m个模板。1105. It is detected that the user allows to receive the first operation of the m templates, and in response to the first operation, receive and acquire the m templates, and display the m templates in the prompt window.
可选地,在接收端设备检测到发送端设备发送的m个模板时,可以在所述显示屏上显示提示窗口,所述提示窗口用于提示用户选择是否接收所述m个模板,用户通过该第一操作确定接收所述m个模板。Optionally, when the receiving end device detects m templates sent by the sending end device, a prompt window may be displayed on the display screen, the prompt window is used to prompt the user to choose whether to receive the m templates, and the user passes The first operation determines to receive the m templates.
1106,在所述提示窗口中检测到选择目标模板的第二操作,响应于所述第二操作,确定所述目标模板;1106. Detecting a second operation of selecting a target template in the prompt window, and determining the target template in response to the second operation;
1107,根据所述目标模板的类型和预设关系,确定所述目标模板关联的一个或多个应用。1107. Determine one or more applications associated with the target template according to the type of the target template and a preset relationship.
应理解,接收端设备可以解析并获取该一个或多个模板中包含的参数信息,且接收端设备可以根据文件类型、文件名称、参数类型等确定接收的任意一个文件所具有的功能、所关联的一个或多个应用。It should be understood that the receiving end device can parse and obtain the parameter information contained in the one or more templates, and the receiving end device can determine the function and associated of one or more applications.
一种可能的方式中,当所述目标模板关联一个应用时,直接调用并显示所述应用的界面,由所述应用解析所述目标模板,获取所述目标模板中包括的一种或多种参数。In a possible manner, when the target template is associated with an application, the interface of the application is directly invoked and displayed, and the application parses the target template to obtain one or more parameter.
可选地,当所述目标模板是拍摄模板时,所述目标模板关联的一个或多个应用包括所述接收端设备上安装的具有拍摄功能的一个或多个应用。Optionally, when the target template is a shooting template, the one or more applications associated with the target template include one or more applications with a shooting function installed on the receiving end device.
可选地,当所述拍摄模板关联相机应用时,调用所述相机应用并显示第一拍摄预览界面,所述第一拍摄预览界面包括基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数显示的画面。Optionally, when the shooting template is associated with a camera application, the camera application is invoked and a first shooting preview interface is displayed, the first shooting preview interface includes one or more shooting parameters based on the shooting template displayed screen.
示例性的,用户点击如图10中的(d)图所示的“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以直接直接启动相机应用,并跳转显示如图10中的(f)图所示的相机应用的拍摄预览界面1006,使得用户可以基于接收的该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)包括的一种或多种拍摄参数拍摄其他画面。Exemplarily, the user clicks the "OK" control as shown in (d) in Figure 10, and in response to the user's operation, the tablet can directly start the camera application, and jump to display (f) in Figure 10 The
或者,当所述拍摄模板关联多个具有拍摄功能的应用时,响应于所述第三操作,调用所述目标应用并显示第二拍摄预览界面,所述第二拍摄预览界面包括基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数显示的画面。Or, when the shooting template is associated with multiple applications with shooting functions, in response to the third operation, the target application is invoked and a second shooting preview interface is displayed, and the second shooting preview interface includes The screen displayed by one or more shooting parameters included in the template.
以及,所述接收端设备可以在所述第一拍摄预览界面或所述第二拍摄预览界面检测到用于拍摄的第四操作,响应于所述第四操作,基于所述拍摄模板中包括的一种或多种拍摄参数,拍摄得到第二多媒体文件,使得所述第二多媒体文件和所述第一多媒体文件具有相同的拍摄效果,所述第二多媒体文件是照片、动图或视频片段中的任意一种。And, the receiver device may detect a fourth operation for shooting on the first shooting preview interface or the second shooting preview interface, and in response to the fourth operation, based on the One or more shooting parameters, shooting to obtain a second multimedia file, so that the second multimedia file and the first multimedia file have the same shooting effect, and the second multimedia file is Any of photos, GIFs, or video clips.
示例性的,如图10中的(d)图所示,当平板上具有拍摄功能的应用为多个时,用户点击如图10中的(d)图所示的“确定”控件,响应于用户的操作,平板可以显示图10中的(e)图所示的界面1005,该接界面1005上的提示窗口1005-1中显示了平板上具有拍摄功能的美拍、微信、相机等多个应用,本申请实施例对可以关联的多个应用不作限定。用户可以在该提示窗口1005-1中选择所需要的应用,例如点击相机应用的图标,响应于用户的操作,平板跳转显示如图10中的(f)图所示的相机应用的拍摄预览界面1006,使得用户可以基于接收的该拍摄指导文件(照片1-D)包括的一种或多种拍摄参数拍摄其他画面。Exemplarily, as shown in (d) in FIG. 10, when there are multiple applications with the shooting function on the tablet, the user clicks the "OK" control as shown in (d) in FIG. The user's operation, the tablet can display the
还应理解,本申请实施例提供的拍摄场景还可以用于录制视频的场景、双景拍摄、多景拍摄、人像、录像、夜景、专业等其他不同拍摄模式或拍摄场景,本申请实施例对此不作限定。其中,每个拍摄模式都有各自的特殊性,但是拍摄过程、编辑操作过程和对应的参数可以参考前述介绍的拍摄照片的过程,所有的拍摄模式都可以生成对应的拍摄指导文件。It should also be understood that the shooting scenes provided in the embodiments of the present application can also be used for recording video scenes, dual-view shooting, multi-view shooting, portraits, videos, night scenes, professional and other different shooting modes or shooting scenes. This is not limited. Among them, each shooting mode has its own particularity, but the shooting process, editing operation process and corresponding parameters can refer to the process of taking photos described above, and all shooting modes can generate corresponding shooting guidance files.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供的分享多媒体文件的方法,能够在拍摄照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,根据一种或多种拍摄参数生成拍摄指导文件;以及,在对照片、视频等多媒体文件进行编辑处理的过程中,根据一种或多种编辑参数生成编辑指导文件。在发送端设备向接收端设备分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的过程中,可以为用户显示该多媒体文件关联的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,支持用户手动选择期望分享的一种或多种文件。To sum up, the method for sharing multimedia files provided by the embodiment of the present application can generate shooting guidance files according to one or more shooting parameters during the process of taking multimedia files such as photos and videos; In the process of editing multimedia files such as multimedia files, an editing instruction file is generated according to one or more editing parameters. In the process of sharing multimedia files such as photos and videos with the receiving device, the sending device can display one or more of the original file, intermediate file, final file, shooting guidance file and editing guidance file associated with the multimedia file for the user. , which supports users to manually select one or more types of files they want to share.
根据不同的分享需求,用户可以手动选择将照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、中间文件、最终文件、拍摄指导文件和编辑指导文件中的一种或多种,发送给接收端设备,在分享照片、视频等多媒体文件的同时,实现了拍摄过程和编辑过程的分享,能够实现将照片、视频等多媒体文件的拍摄过程和编辑经验也发送给接收端设备,使得接收端设备可以根据拍摄指导文件中包括的拍摄参数指导拍摄过程,和/或,根据编辑指导文件中包括的编辑参数制作充满趣味的多媒体文件,更好地实现了文件共享,提升了用户的使用体验。According to different sharing requirements, users can manually choose to send one or more of the original files, intermediate files, final files, shooting guidance files, and editing guidance files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to the receiving device. At the same time as multimedia files such as photos and videos, the sharing of the shooting process and editing process can be realized, and the shooting process and editing experience of multimedia files such as photos and videos can also be sent to the receiving end device, so that the receiving end device can follow the shooting guide file The shooting parameters included in the guide file guide the shooting process, and/or create interesting multimedia files according to the editing parameters included in the editing guidance file, which better realizes file sharing and improves user experience.
此外,在用户手动选择待分享的照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件、对应的拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件过程中,在分享界面上,电子设备可以基于照片、视频等多媒体文件的原始文件,叠加拍摄指导文件和/或编辑指导文件等多种可能的文件,为用户生成静态或动态的在线预览画面,有助于用户查看不同文件对应的显示效果,便于用户选择待分享的文件,分享的目的更加精确。In addition, when the user manually selects the original files of multimedia files such as photos and videos to be shared, the corresponding shooting guidance files and/or editing guidance files, on the sharing interface, the electronic device can Files, superimposing multiple possible files such as shooting guide files and/or editing guide files, generates static or dynamic online preview images for users, helps users view the corresponding display effects of different files, and facilitates users to select files to be shared. The purpose of sharing is more precise.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B, 单独存在B这三种情况。另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。It should be noted that, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this article is only a Describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, "plurality" refers to two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。示例性的,在本申请实施例中,“第一模板”、“第二模板”表示不同的模板,例如拍摄指导模板、编辑指导模板等,“第一多媒体文件”、“第二多媒体文件”表示不同显示效果的照片等多媒体文件。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. Exemplarily, in this embodiment of the application, "first template" and "second template" represent different templates, such as shooting guide template, editing guide template, etc. "first multimedia file", "second multiple "Media file" refers to multimedia files such as photos with different display effects.
应理解,本申请实施例中的方式、情况、类别以及实施例的划分仅是为了描述的方便,不应构成特别的限定,各种方式、类别、情况以及实施例中的特征在不矛盾的情况下可以相结合。It should be understood that the division of methods, situations, categories and embodiments in the embodiments of the present application is only for the convenience of description and should not constitute a special limitation. The features in various methods, categories, situations and embodiments are not contradictory cases can be combined.
还应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the sequence numbers of the processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
还需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,“预设”、“固定值”等可以通过在电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定,例如“预设的模板”等。It should also be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, "preset", "fixed value", etc. can be used by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other It can be implemented by indicating relevant information, and this application does not limit the specific implementation, such as "preset template" and so on.
可以理解的是,电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件和/或软件模块。结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以结合实施例对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the electronic device (eg, the sending-end device, the receiving-end device, etc.) includes corresponding hardware and/or software modules for performing each function. Combining the algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software drives hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions in combination with the embodiments for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
本实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是,本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment, the functional modules of the electronic device (such as the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) can be divided according to the above method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be divided into integrated in one processing module. The above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,上述实施例中涉及的电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)的一种可能的组成示意图,该电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)可以包括:显示单元、检测单元和处理单元。其中,显示单元、检测单元和处理单元相互配合,可以用于支持电子设备执行上述步骤等,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。In the case of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function, a possible composition diagram of the electronic device (such as the sending end device, receiving end device, etc.) involved in the above embodiment, the electronic device (such as the sending end device, receiving end device, etc.) terminal equipment, etc.) may include: a display unit, a detection unit and a processing unit. Wherein, the display unit, the detection unit and the processing unit cooperate with each other, and can be used to support the electronic device to execute the above steps, etc., and/or be used in other processes of the technologies described herein.
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be referred to the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
本实施例提供的电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等),用于执行上述分享多媒体文件的方法,因此可以达到与上述实现方法相同的效果。The electronic device provided in this embodiment (for example, the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) is used to implement the above method for sharing multimedia files, so it can achieve the same effect as the above implementation method.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)可以包括处理模块、存储模块和通信模块。其中,处理模块可以用于对电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)的动作进行控制管理,例如,可以用于支持电子设备(例 如发送端设备、接收端设备等)执行上述显示单元、检测单元和处理单元执行的步骤。存储模块可以用于支持电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)执行存储程序代码和数据等。通信模块,可以用于支持发送端设备和接收端设备之间的通信。In the case of using an integrated unit, the electronic device (such as a sending end device, a receiving end device, etc.) may include a processing module, a storage module, and a communication module. Wherein, the processing module can be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device (such as the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.), for example, it can be used to support the electronic device (such as the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) to execute the above display unit , the steps performed by the detection unit and the processing unit. The storage module can be used to support electronic devices (such as sending end devices, receiving end devices, etc.) to execute and store program codes, data, and the like. The communication module can be used to support the communication between the sending end device and the receiving end device.
其中,处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)和微处理器的组合等等。存储模块可以是存储器。通信模块具体可以为射频电路、蓝牙芯片、Wi-Fi芯片等与其他电子设备交互的设备。Wherein, the processing module may be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute the various illustrative logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the present disclosure. The processor can also be a combination of computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP) and a microprocessor, and the like. The storage module may be a memory. Specifically, the communication module may be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, and a Wi-Fi chip.
在一个实施例中,当处理模块为处理器,存储模块为存储器时,本实施例所涉及的电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)可以为具有图1所示结构的设备。In one embodiment, when the processing module is a processor and the storage module is a memory, the electronic device (such as a sending device, a receiving device, etc.) involved in this embodiment may be a device having the structure shown in FIG. 1 .
本实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当该计算机指令在电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)上运行时,使得电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)执行上述相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中分享多媒体文件的方法。This embodiment also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device (such as a sending-end device, a receiving-end device, etc.), the electronic device (for example, the sending end device, the receiving end device, etc.) execute the above related method steps to implement the method for sharing multimedia files in the above embodiment.
本实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述相关步骤,以实现上述实施例中分享多媒体文件的方法。This embodiment also provides a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the above related steps, so as to implement the method for sharing multimedia files in the above embodiment.
另外,本申请的实施例还提供一种装置,这个装置具体可以是芯片,组件或模块,该装置可包括相连的处理器和存储器;其中,存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,当装置运行时,处理器可执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,以使芯片执行上述各方法实施例中拍摄指导、分享多媒体文件的方法。In addition, an embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may specifically be a chip, a component or a module, and the device may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and when the device is running, The processor can execute the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the methods for shooting guidance and sharing multimedia files in the above method embodiments.
其中,本实施例提供的电子设备(例如发送端设备、接收端设备等)、计算机可读存储介质、计算机程序产品或芯片均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the electronic equipment (such as sending end equipment, receiving end equipment, etc.), computer readable storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are all used to execute the corresponding method provided above, therefore, it can For the beneficial effects achieved, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the corresponding methods provided above, which will not be repeated here.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above-mentioned functions can be assigned by different Completion of functional modules means that the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be combined or It may be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。A unit described as a separate component may or may not be physically separated, and a component shown as a unit may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, which may be located in one place or distributed to multiple different places. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成 的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If an integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the software product is stored in a storage medium Among them, several instructions are included to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods in various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes such as U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only the specific implementation of the application, but the scope of protection of the application is not limited thereto. Anyone familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the application, and should covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (17)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202210105141.4 | 2022-01-27 | ||
| CN202210105141.4A CN116567394A (en) | 2022-01-27 | 2022-01-27 | A method for sharing multimedia files, a sending end device and a receiving end device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2023142731A1 true WO2023142731A1 (en) | 2023-08-03 |
Family
ID=87470357
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2022/138535 Ceased WO2023142731A1 (en) | 2022-01-27 | 2022-12-13 | Method for sharing multimedia file, sending end device, and receiving end device |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN116567394A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2023142731A1 (en) |
Cited By (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN119449962A (en) * | 2023-08-07 | 2025-02-14 | 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 | A media content processing method, device, equipment and medium |
| CN119996822A (en) * | 2023-11-03 | 2025-05-13 | 荣耀终端股份有限公司 | A method and device for processing continuous-shot images |
| WO2026011465A1 (en) * | 2024-07-12 | 2026-01-15 | 荣耀终端股份有限公司 | Picture display method and electronic device |
Families Citing this family (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN119916991A (en) * | 2023-10-30 | 2025-05-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | Electronic device and information processing method and medium thereof |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20100325547A1 (en) * | 2009-06-18 | 2010-12-23 | Cyberlink Corp. | Systems and Methods for Sharing Multimedia Editing Projects |
| CN105635563A (en) * | 2015-10-21 | 2016-06-01 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | Photographing method, device and system and mobile terminal |
| CN107580172A (en) * | 2016-07-05 | 2018-01-12 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Picture taking mode processing method, device and picture shooting method, device |
| CN110933306A (en) * | 2019-11-29 | 2020-03-27 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Method for sharing shooting parameters and electronic equipment |
| CN113824878A (en) * | 2021-08-20 | 2021-12-21 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting control method and electronic device based on foldable screen |
-
2022
- 2022-01-27 CN CN202210105141.4A patent/CN116567394A/en active Pending
- 2022-12-13 WO PCT/CN2022/138535 patent/WO2023142731A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20100325547A1 (en) * | 2009-06-18 | 2010-12-23 | Cyberlink Corp. | Systems and Methods for Sharing Multimedia Editing Projects |
| CN105635563A (en) * | 2015-10-21 | 2016-06-01 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | Photographing method, device and system and mobile terminal |
| CN107580172A (en) * | 2016-07-05 | 2018-01-12 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Picture taking mode processing method, device and picture shooting method, device |
| CN110933306A (en) * | 2019-11-29 | 2020-03-27 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Method for sharing shooting parameters and electronic equipment |
| CN113824878A (en) * | 2021-08-20 | 2021-12-21 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting control method and electronic device based on foldable screen |
Cited By (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN119449962A (en) * | 2023-08-07 | 2025-02-14 | 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 | A media content processing method, device, equipment and medium |
| CN119996822A (en) * | 2023-11-03 | 2025-05-13 | 荣耀终端股份有限公司 | A method and device for processing continuous-shot images |
| WO2026011465A1 (en) * | 2024-07-12 | 2026-01-15 | 荣耀终端股份有限公司 | Picture display method and electronic device |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN116567394A (en) | 2023-08-08 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US12096120B2 (en) | Photographing method in telephoto scenario and mobile terminal | |
| CN110231905B (en) | Screen capturing method and electronic equipment | |
| EP4361805A1 (en) | Method for generating theme wallpaper, and electronic device | |
| US12154251B2 (en) | Image processing method and related apparatus | |
| CN113497890B (en) | Shooting method and equipment | |
| WO2020253719A1 (en) | Screen recording method and electronic device | |
| WO2023142731A1 (en) | Method for sharing multimedia file, sending end device, and receiving end device | |
| WO2022068511A1 (en) | Video generation method and electronic device | |
| CN114866681B (en) | Cross-equipment collaborative shooting method, related device and system | |
| WO2020113534A1 (en) | Method for photographing long-exposure image and electronic device | |
| CN113037928A (en) | Method for presenting video by electronic equipment in incoming call and electronic equipment | |
| WO2022228010A1 (en) | Method for generating cover, and electronic device | |
| WO2024041394A1 (en) | Photographing method and related apparatus | |
| WO2023036084A1 (en) | Image processing method and related apparatus | |
| CN117425065A (en) | Photography method and related equipment | |
| CN114979457A (en) | Image processing method and related device | |
| US12401890B2 (en) | Photographing method and electronic device | |
| WO2023160224A9 (en) | Photographing method and related device | |
| WO2023143171A1 (en) | Audio acquisition method and electronic device | |
| CN114827439A (en) | Panoramic image shooting method and electronic equipment | |
| CN113452895A (en) | Shooting method and equipment | |
| US20240364997A1 (en) | Shooting Restoration Method and Electronic Device | |
| CN116414280B (en) | Image display method and electronic device | |
| CN114968147B (en) | A method, electronic device and system for splicing displays | |
| WO2025113593A1 (en) | Picture editing method, electronic device, and storage medium |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 22923519 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 22923519 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |